diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'gcc/expr.c')
| -rw-r--r-- | gcc/expr.c | 9473 |
1 files changed, 9473 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/gcc/expr.c b/gcc/expr.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c6bc426 --- /dev/null +++ b/gcc/expr.c @@ -0,0 +1,9473 @@ +/* Convert tree expression to rtl instructions, for GNU compiler. + Copyright (C) 1988, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, + 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Free Software Foundation, + Inc. + +This file is part of GCC. + +GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free +Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later +version. + +GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY +WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License +for more details. + +You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +along with GCC; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free +Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA +02110-1301, USA. */ + +#include "config.h" +#include "system.h" +#include "coretypes.h" +#include "tm.h" +#include "machmode.h" +#include "real.h" +#include "rtl.h" +#include "tree.h" +#include "flags.h" +#include "regs.h" +#include "hard-reg-set.h" +#include "except.h" +#include "function.h" +#include "insn-config.h" +#include "insn-attr.h" +/* Include expr.h after insn-config.h so we get HAVE_conditional_move. */ +#include "expr.h" +#include "optabs.h" +#include "libfuncs.h" +#include "recog.h" +#include "reload.h" +#include "output.h" +#include "typeclass.h" +#include "toplev.h" +#include "ggc.h" +#include "langhooks.h" +#include "intl.h" +#include "tm_p.h" +#include "tree-iterator.h" +#include "tree-pass.h" +#include "tree-flow.h" +#include "target.h" +#include "timevar.h" + +/* Decide whether a function's arguments should be processed + from first to last or from last to first. + + They should if the stack and args grow in opposite directions, but + only if we have push insns. */ + +#ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING + +#ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED +#if defined (STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD) != defined (ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD) +#define PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED /* If it's last to first. */ +#endif +#endif + +#endif + +#ifndef STACK_PUSH_CODE +#ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD +#define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_DEC +#else +#define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_INC +#endif +#endif + + +/* If this is nonzero, we do not bother generating VOLATILE + around volatile memory references, and we are willing to + output indirect addresses. If cse is to follow, we reject + indirect addresses so a useful potential cse is generated; + if it is used only once, instruction combination will produce + the same indirect address eventually. */ +int cse_not_expected; + +/* This structure is used by move_by_pieces to describe the move to + be performed. */ +struct move_by_pieces +{ + rtx to; + rtx to_addr; + int autinc_to; + int explicit_inc_to; + rtx from; + rtx from_addr; + int autinc_from; + int explicit_inc_from; + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len; + HOST_WIDE_INT offset; + int reverse; +}; + +/* This structure is used by store_by_pieces to describe the clear to + be performed. */ + +struct store_by_pieces +{ + rtx to; + rtx to_addr; + int autinc_to; + int explicit_inc_to; + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len; + HOST_WIDE_INT offset; + rtx (*constfun) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode); + void *constfundata; + int reverse; +}; + +static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT move_by_pieces_ninsns (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, + unsigned int, + unsigned int); +static void move_by_pieces_1 (rtx (*) (rtx, ...), enum machine_mode, + struct move_by_pieces *); +static bool block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm (void); +static bool emit_block_move_via_movmem (rtx, rtx, rtx, unsigned); +static rtx emit_block_move_via_libcall (rtx, rtx, rtx, bool); +static tree emit_block_move_libcall_fn (int); +static void emit_block_move_via_loop (rtx, rtx, rtx, unsigned); +static rtx clear_by_pieces_1 (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode); +static void clear_by_pieces (rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, unsigned int); +static void store_by_pieces_1 (struct store_by_pieces *, unsigned int); +static void store_by_pieces_2 (rtx (*) (rtx, ...), enum machine_mode, + struct store_by_pieces *); +static rtx clear_storage_via_libcall (rtx, rtx, bool); +static tree clear_storage_libcall_fn (int); +static rtx compress_float_constant (rtx, rtx); +static rtx get_subtarget (rtx); +static void store_constructor_field (rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, + HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode, + tree, tree, int, int); +static void store_constructor (tree, rtx, int, HOST_WIDE_INT); +static rtx store_field (rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode, + tree, tree, int); + +static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT highest_pow2_factor_for_target (tree, tree); + +static int is_aligning_offset (tree, tree); +static void expand_operands (tree, tree, rtx, rtx*, rtx*, + enum expand_modifier); +static rtx reduce_to_bit_field_precision (rtx, rtx, tree); +static rtx do_store_flag (tree, rtx, enum machine_mode, int); +#ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING +static void emit_single_push_insn (enum machine_mode, rtx, tree); +#endif +static void do_tablejump (rtx, enum machine_mode, rtx, rtx, rtx); +static rtx const_vector_from_tree (tree); +static void write_complex_part (rtx, rtx, bool); + +/* Record for each mode whether we can move a register directly to or + from an object of that mode in memory. If we can't, we won't try + to use that mode directly when accessing a field of that mode. */ + +static char direct_load[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +static char direct_store[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; + +/* Record for each mode whether we can float-extend from memory. */ + +static bool float_extend_from_mem[NUM_MACHINE_MODES][NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; + +/* This macro is used to determine whether move_by_pieces should be called + to perform a structure copy. */ +#ifndef MOVE_BY_PIECES_P +#define MOVE_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \ + (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, MOVE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \ + < (unsigned int) MOVE_RATIO) +#endif + +/* This macro is used to determine whether clear_by_pieces should be + called to clear storage. */ +#ifndef CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P +#define CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \ + (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \ + < (unsigned int) CLEAR_RATIO) +#endif + +/* This macro is used to determine whether store_by_pieces should be + called to "memset" storage with byte values other than zero, or + to "memcpy" storage when the source is a constant string. */ +#ifndef STORE_BY_PIECES_P +#define STORE_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \ + (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \ + < (unsigned int) MOVE_RATIO) +#endif + +/* This array records the insn_code of insns to perform block moves. */ +enum insn_code movmem_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; + +/* This array records the insn_code of insns to perform block sets. */ +enum insn_code setmem_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; + +/* These arrays record the insn_code of three different kinds of insns + to perform block compares. */ +enum insn_code cmpstr_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code cmpstrn_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code cmpmem_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; + +/* Synchronization primitives. */ +enum insn_code sync_add_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_sub_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_ior_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_and_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_xor_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_nand_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_old_add_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_old_sub_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_old_ior_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_old_and_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_old_xor_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_old_nand_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_new_add_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_new_sub_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_new_ior_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_new_and_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_new_xor_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_new_nand_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_compare_and_swap[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_compare_and_swap_cc[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_lock_test_and_set[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; +enum insn_code sync_lock_release[NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; + +/* SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS is nonzero if unaligned accesses are very slow. */ + +#ifndef SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS +#define SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS(MODE, ALIGN) STRICT_ALIGNMENT +#endif + +/* This is run once per compilation to set up which modes can be used + directly in memory and to initialize the block move optab. */ + +void +init_expr_once (void) +{ + rtx insn, pat; + enum machine_mode mode; + int num_clobbers; + rtx mem, mem1; + rtx reg; + + /* Try indexing by frame ptr and try by stack ptr. + It is known that on the Convex the stack ptr isn't a valid index. + With luck, one or the other is valid on any machine. */ + mem = gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode, stack_pointer_rtx); + mem1 = gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode, frame_pointer_rtx); + + /* A scratch register we can modify in-place below to avoid + useless RTL allocations. */ + reg = gen_rtx_REG (VOIDmode, -1); + + insn = rtx_alloc (INSN); + pat = gen_rtx_SET (0, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX); + PATTERN (insn) = pat; + + for (mode = VOIDmode; (int) mode < NUM_MACHINE_MODES; + mode = (enum machine_mode) ((int) mode + 1)) + { + int regno; + + direct_load[(int) mode] = direct_store[(int) mode] = 0; + PUT_MODE (mem, mode); + PUT_MODE (mem1, mode); + PUT_MODE (reg, mode); + + /* See if there is some register that can be used in this mode and + directly loaded or stored from memory. */ + + if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != BLKmode) + for (regno = 0; regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER + && (direct_load[(int) mode] == 0 || direct_store[(int) mode] == 0); + regno++) + { + if (! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno, mode)) + continue; + + REGNO (reg) = regno; + + SET_SRC (pat) = mem; + SET_DEST (pat) = reg; + if (recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers) >= 0) + direct_load[(int) mode] = 1; + + SET_SRC (pat) = mem1; + SET_DEST (pat) = reg; + if (recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers) >= 0) + direct_load[(int) mode] = 1; + + SET_SRC (pat) = reg; + SET_DEST (pat) = mem; + if (recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers) >= 0) + direct_store[(int) mode] = 1; + + SET_SRC (pat) = reg; + SET_DEST (pat) = mem1; + if (recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers) >= 0) + direct_store[(int) mode] = 1; + } + } + + mem = gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_raw_REG (Pmode, 10000)); + + for (mode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_FLOAT); mode != VOIDmode; + mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode)) + { + enum machine_mode srcmode; + for (srcmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_FLOAT); srcmode != mode; + srcmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (srcmode)) + { + enum insn_code ic; + + ic = can_extend_p (mode, srcmode, 0); + if (ic == CODE_FOR_nothing) + continue; + + PUT_MODE (mem, srcmode); + + if ((*insn_data[ic].operand[1].predicate) (mem, srcmode)) + float_extend_from_mem[mode][srcmode] = true; + } + } +} + +/* This is run at the start of compiling a function. */ + +void +init_expr (void) +{ + cfun->expr = ggc_alloc_cleared (sizeof (struct expr_status)); +} + +/* Copy data from FROM to TO, where the machine modes are not the same. + Both modes may be integer, or both may be floating. + UNSIGNEDP should be nonzero if FROM is an unsigned type. + This causes zero-extension instead of sign-extension. */ + +void +convert_move (rtx to, rtx from, int unsignedp) +{ + enum machine_mode to_mode = GET_MODE (to); + enum machine_mode from_mode = GET_MODE (from); + int to_real = SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (to_mode); + int from_real = SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode); + enum insn_code code; + rtx libcall; + + /* rtx code for making an equivalent value. */ + enum rtx_code equiv_code = (unsignedp < 0 ? UNKNOWN + : (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND)); + + + gcc_assert (to_real == from_real); + + /* If the source and destination are already the same, then there's + nothing to do. */ + if (to == from) + return; + + /* If FROM is a SUBREG that indicates that we have already done at least + the required extension, strip it. We don't handle such SUBREGs as + TO here. */ + + if (GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (from) + && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (from))) + >= GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode)) + && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (from) == unsignedp) + from = gen_lowpart (to_mode, from), from_mode = to_mode; + + gcc_assert (GET_CODE (to) != SUBREG || !SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (to)); + + if (to_mode == from_mode + || (from_mode == VOIDmode && CONSTANT_P (from))) + { + emit_move_insn (to, from); + return; + } + + if (VECTOR_MODE_P (to_mode) || VECTOR_MODE_P (from_mode)) + { + gcc_assert (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode)); + + if (VECTOR_MODE_P (to_mode)) + from = simplify_gen_subreg (to_mode, from, GET_MODE (from), 0); + else + to = simplify_gen_subreg (from_mode, to, GET_MODE (to), 0); + + emit_move_insn (to, from); + return; + } + + if (GET_CODE (to) == CONCAT && GET_CODE (from) == CONCAT) + { + convert_move (XEXP (to, 0), XEXP (from, 0), unsignedp); + convert_move (XEXP (to, 1), XEXP (from, 1), unsignedp); + return; + } + + if (to_real) + { + rtx value, insns; + convert_optab tab; + + gcc_assert ((GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode) + != GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode)) + || (DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode) + != DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (to_mode))); + + if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode)) + /* Conversion between decimal float and binary float, same size. */ + tab = DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode) ? trunc_optab : sext_optab; + else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode)) + tab = sext_optab; + else + tab = trunc_optab; + + /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported. */ + + code = tab->handlers[to_mode][from_mode].insn_code; + if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing) + { + emit_unop_insn (code, to, from, + tab == sext_optab ? FLOAT_EXTEND : FLOAT_TRUNCATE); + return; + } + + /* Otherwise use a libcall. */ + libcall = tab->handlers[to_mode][from_mode].libfunc; + + /* Is this conversion implemented yet? */ + gcc_assert (libcall); + + start_sequence (); + value = emit_library_call_value (libcall, NULL_RTX, LCT_CONST, to_mode, + 1, from, from_mode); + insns = get_insns (); + end_sequence (); + emit_libcall_block (insns, to, value, + tab == trunc_optab ? gen_rtx_FLOAT_TRUNCATE (to_mode, + from) + : gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (to_mode, from)); + return; + } + + /* Handle pointer conversion. */ /* SPEE 900220. */ + /* Targets are expected to provide conversion insns between PxImode and + xImode for all MODE_PARTIAL_INT modes they use, but no others. */ + if (GET_MODE_CLASS (to_mode) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT) + { + enum machine_mode full_mode + = smallest_mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode), MODE_INT); + + gcc_assert (trunc_optab->handlers[to_mode][full_mode].insn_code + != CODE_FOR_nothing); + + if (full_mode != from_mode) + from = convert_to_mode (full_mode, from, unsignedp); + emit_unop_insn (trunc_optab->handlers[to_mode][full_mode].insn_code, + to, from, UNKNOWN); + return; + } + if (GET_MODE_CLASS (from_mode) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT) + { + rtx new_from; + enum machine_mode full_mode + = smallest_mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode), MODE_INT); + + gcc_assert (sext_optab->handlers[full_mode][from_mode].insn_code + != CODE_FOR_nothing); + + if (to_mode == full_mode) + { + emit_unop_insn (sext_optab->handlers[full_mode][from_mode].insn_code, + to, from, UNKNOWN); + return; + } + + new_from = gen_reg_rtx (full_mode); + emit_unop_insn (sext_optab->handlers[full_mode][from_mode].insn_code, + new_from, from, UNKNOWN); + + /* else proceed to integer conversions below. */ + from_mode = full_mode; + from = new_from; + } + + /* Now both modes are integers. */ + + /* Handle expanding beyond a word. */ + if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) + && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) > BITS_PER_WORD) + { + rtx insns; + rtx lowpart; + rtx fill_value; + rtx lowfrom; + int i; + enum machine_mode lowpart_mode; + int nwords = CEIL (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode), UNITS_PER_WORD); + + /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported. */ + if ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, from_mode, unsignedp)) + != CODE_FOR_nothing) + { + /* If FROM is a SUBREG, put it into a register. Do this + so that we always generate the same set of insns for + better cse'ing; if an intermediate assignment occurred, + we won't be doing the operation directly on the SUBREG. */ + if (optimize > 0 && GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG) + from = force_reg (from_mode, from); + emit_unop_insn (code, to, from, equiv_code); + return; + } + /* Next, try converting via full word. */ + else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < BITS_PER_WORD + && ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, word_mode, unsignedp)) + != CODE_FOR_nothing)) + { + if (REG_P (to)) + { + if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (to, from)) + from = force_reg (from_mode, from); + emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, to)); + } + convert_move (gen_lowpart (word_mode, to), from, unsignedp); + emit_unop_insn (code, to, + gen_lowpart (word_mode, to), equiv_code); + return; + } + + /* No special multiword conversion insn; do it by hand. */ + start_sequence (); + + /* Since we will turn this into a no conflict block, we must ensure + that the source does not overlap the target. */ + + if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (to, from)) + from = force_reg (from_mode, from); + + /* Get a copy of FROM widened to a word, if necessary. */ + if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < BITS_PER_WORD) + lowpart_mode = word_mode; + else + lowpart_mode = from_mode; + + lowfrom = convert_to_mode (lowpart_mode, from, unsignedp); + + lowpart = gen_lowpart (lowpart_mode, to); + emit_move_insn (lowpart, lowfrom); + + /* Compute the value to put in each remaining word. */ + if (unsignedp) + fill_value = const0_rtx; + else + { +#ifdef HAVE_slt + if (HAVE_slt + && insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_slt].operand[0].mode == word_mode + && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1) + { + emit_cmp_insn (lowfrom, const0_rtx, NE, NULL_RTX, + lowpart_mode, 0); + fill_value = gen_reg_rtx (word_mode); + emit_insn (gen_slt (fill_value)); + } + else +#endif + { + fill_value + = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, lowpart_mode, lowfrom, + size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (lowpart_mode) - 1), + NULL_RTX, 0); + fill_value = convert_to_mode (word_mode, fill_value, 1); + } + } + + /* Fill the remaining words. */ + for (i = GET_MODE_SIZE (lowpart_mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD; i < nwords; i++) + { + int index = (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN ? nwords - i - 1 : i); + rtx subword = operand_subword (to, index, 1, to_mode); + + gcc_assert (subword); + + if (fill_value != subword) + emit_move_insn (subword, fill_value); + } + + insns = get_insns (); + end_sequence (); + + emit_no_conflict_block (insns, to, from, NULL_RTX, + gen_rtx_fmt_e (equiv_code, to_mode, copy_rtx (from))); + return; + } + + /* Truncating multi-word to a word or less. */ + if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) > BITS_PER_WORD + && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) <= BITS_PER_WORD) + { + if (!((MEM_P (from) + && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from) + && direct_load[(int) to_mode] + && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from, 0))) + || REG_P (from) + || GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG)) + from = force_reg (from_mode, from); + convert_move (to, gen_lowpart (word_mode, from), 0); + return; + } + + /* Now follow all the conversions between integers + no more than a word long. */ + + /* For truncation, usually we can just refer to FROM in a narrower mode. */ + if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) + && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode), + GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode))) + { + if (!((MEM_P (from) + && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from) + && direct_load[(int) to_mode] + && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from, 0))) + || REG_P (from) + || GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG)) + from = force_reg (from_mode, from); + if (REG_P (from) && REGNO (from) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER + && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (from), to_mode)) + from = copy_to_reg (from); + emit_move_insn (to, gen_lowpart (to_mode, from)); + return; + } + + /* Handle extension. */ + if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode)) + { + /* Convert directly if that works. */ + if ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, from_mode, unsignedp)) + != CODE_FOR_nothing) + { + emit_unop_insn (code, to, from, equiv_code); + return; + } + else + { + enum machine_mode intermediate; + rtx tmp; + tree shift_amount; + + /* Search for a mode to convert via. */ + for (intermediate = from_mode; intermediate != VOIDmode; + intermediate = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (intermediate)) + if (((can_extend_p (to_mode, intermediate, unsignedp) + != CODE_FOR_nothing) + || (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (intermediate) + && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode), + GET_MODE_BITSIZE (intermediate)))) + && (can_extend_p (intermediate, from_mode, unsignedp) + != CODE_FOR_nothing)) + { + convert_move (to, convert_to_mode (intermediate, from, + unsignedp), unsignedp); + return; + } + + /* No suitable intermediate mode. + Generate what we need with shifts. */ + shift_amount = build_int_cst (NULL_TREE, + GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) + - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode)); + from = gen_lowpart (to_mode, force_reg (from_mode, from)); + tmp = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, to_mode, from, shift_amount, + to, unsignedp); + tmp = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, to_mode, tmp, shift_amount, + to, unsignedp); + if (tmp != to) + emit_move_insn (to, tmp); + return; + } + } + + /* Support special truncate insns for certain modes. */ + if (trunc_optab->handlers[to_mode][from_mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing) + { + emit_unop_insn (trunc_optab->handlers[to_mode][from_mode].insn_code, + to, from, UNKNOWN); + return; + } + + /* Handle truncation of volatile memrefs, and so on; + the things that couldn't be truncated directly, + and for which there was no special instruction. + + ??? Code above formerly short-circuited this, for most integer + mode pairs, with a force_reg in from_mode followed by a recursive + call to this routine. Appears always to have been wrong. */ + if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode)) + { + rtx temp = force_reg (to_mode, gen_lowpart (to_mode, from)); + emit_move_insn (to, temp); + return; + } + + /* Mode combination is not recognized. */ + gcc_unreachable (); +} + +/* Return an rtx for a value that would result + from converting X to mode MODE. + Both X and MODE may be floating, or both integer. + UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value. + This can be done by referring to a part of X in place + or by copying to a new temporary with conversion. */ + +rtx +convert_to_mode (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, int unsignedp) +{ + return convert_modes (mode, VOIDmode, x, unsignedp); +} + +/* Return an rtx for a value that would result + from converting X from mode OLDMODE to mode MODE. + Both modes may be floating, or both integer. + UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value. + + This can be done by referring to a part of X in place + or by copying to a new temporary with conversion. + + You can give VOIDmode for OLDMODE, if you are sure X has a nonvoid mode. */ + +rtx +convert_modes (enum machine_mode mode, enum machine_mode oldmode, rtx x, int unsignedp) +{ + rtx temp; + + /* If FROM is a SUBREG that indicates that we have already done at least + the required extension, strip it. */ + + if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x) + && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))) >= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) + && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (x) == unsignedp) + x = gen_lowpart (mode, x); + + if (GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode) + oldmode = GET_MODE (x); + + if (mode == oldmode) + return x; + + /* There is one case that we must handle specially: If we are converting + a CONST_INT into a mode whose size is twice HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT and + we are to interpret the constant as unsigned, gen_lowpart will do + the wrong if the constant appears negative. What we want to do is + make the high-order word of the constant zero, not all ones. */ + + if (unsignedp && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT + && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) == 2 * HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT + && GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT && INTVAL (x) < 0) + { + HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (x); + + if (oldmode != VOIDmode + && HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode)) + { + int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode); + + /* We need to zero extend VAL. */ + val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1; + } + + return immed_double_const (val, (HOST_WIDE_INT) 0, mode); + } + + /* We can do this with a gen_lowpart if both desired and current modes + are integer, and this is either a constant integer, a register, or a + non-volatile MEM. Except for the constant case where MODE is no + wider than HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT, we must be narrowing the operand. */ + + if ((GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT + && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) + || (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT + && GET_MODE_CLASS (oldmode) == MODE_INT + && (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE + || (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (oldmode) + && ((MEM_P (x) && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (x) + && direct_load[(int) mode]) + || (REG_P (x) + && (! HARD_REGISTER_P (x) + || HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (x), mode)) + && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), + GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x))))))))) + { + /* ?? If we don't know OLDMODE, we have to assume here that + X does not need sign- or zero-extension. This may not be + the case, but it's the best we can do. */ + if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT && oldmode != VOIDmode + && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (oldmode)) + { + HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (x); + int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode); + + /* We must sign or zero-extend in this case. Start by + zero-extending, then sign extend if we need to. */ + val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1; + if (! unsignedp + && (val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))) + val |= (HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width; + + return gen_int_mode (val, mode); + } + + return gen_lowpart (mode, x); + } + + /* Converting from integer constant into mode is always equivalent to an + subreg operation. */ + if (VECTOR_MODE_P (mode) && GET_MODE (x) == VOIDmode) + { + gcc_assert (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode)); + return simplify_gen_subreg (mode, x, oldmode, 0); + } + + temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode); + convert_move (temp, x, unsignedp); + return temp; +} + +/* STORE_MAX_PIECES is the number of bytes at a time that we can + store efficiently. Due to internal GCC limitations, this is + MOVE_MAX_PIECES limited by the number of bytes GCC can represent + for an immediate constant. */ + +#define STORE_MAX_PIECES MIN (MOVE_MAX_PIECES, 2 * sizeof (HOST_WIDE_INT)) + +/* Determine whether the LEN bytes can be moved by using several move + instructions. Return nonzero if a call to move_by_pieces should + succeed. */ + +int +can_move_by_pieces (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len, + unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) +{ + return MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (len, align); +} + +/* Generate several move instructions to copy LEN bytes from block FROM to + block TO. (These are MEM rtx's with BLKmode). + + If PUSH_ROUNDING is defined and TO is NULL, emit_single_push_insn is + used to push FROM to the stack. + + ALIGN is maximum stack alignment we can assume. + + If ENDP is 0 return to, if ENDP is 1 return memory at the end ala + mempcpy, and if ENDP is 2 return memory the end minus one byte ala + stpcpy. */ + +rtx +move_by_pieces (rtx to, rtx from, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len, + unsigned int align, int endp) +{ + struct move_by_pieces data; + rtx to_addr, from_addr = XEXP (from, 0); + unsigned int max_size = MOVE_MAX_PIECES + 1; + enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode, tmode; + enum insn_code icode; + + align = MIN (to ? MEM_ALIGN (to) : align, MEM_ALIGN (from)); + + data.offset = 0; + data.from_addr = from_addr; + if (to) + { + to_addr = XEXP (to, 0); + data.to = to; + data.autinc_to + = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC + || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC); + data.reverse + = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC); + } + else + { + to_addr = NULL_RTX; + data.to = NULL_RTX; + data.autinc_to = 1; +#ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD + data.reverse = 1; +#else + data.reverse = 0; +#endif + } + data.to_addr = to_addr; + data.from = from; + data.autinc_from + = (GET_CODE (from_addr) == PRE_INC || GET_CODE (from_addr) == PRE_DEC + || GET_CODE (from_addr) == POST_INC + || GET_CODE (from_addr) == POST_DEC); + + data.explicit_inc_from = 0; + data.explicit_inc_to = 0; + if (data.reverse) data.offset = len; + data.len = len; + + /* If copying requires more than two move insns, + copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter) + and use post-increment if available. */ + if (!(data.autinc_from && data.autinc_to) + && move_by_pieces_ninsns (len, align, max_size) > 2) + { + /* Find the mode of the largest move... */ + for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT); + tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode)) + if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size) + mode = tmode; + + if (USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (mode) && data.reverse && ! data.autinc_from) + { + data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (from_addr, len)); + data.autinc_from = 1; + data.explicit_inc_from = -1; + } + if (USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (mode) && ! data.autinc_from) + { + data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (from_addr); + data.autinc_from = 1; + data.explicit_inc_from = 1; + } + if (!data.autinc_from && CONSTANT_P (from_addr)) + data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (from_addr); + if (USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (mode) && data.reverse && ! data.autinc_to) + { + data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (to_addr, len)); + data.autinc_to = 1; + data.explicit_inc_to = -1; + } + if (USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (mode) && ! data.reverse && ! data.autinc_to) + { + data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr); + data.autinc_to = 1; + data.explicit_inc_to = 1; + } + if (!data.autinc_to && CONSTANT_P (to_addr)) + data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr); + } + + tmode = mode_for_size (MOVE_MAX_PIECES * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 1); + if (align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode)) + align = GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode); + else + { + enum machine_mode xmode; + + for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), xmode = tmode; + tmode != VOIDmode; + xmode = tmode, tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode)) + if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > MOVE_MAX_PIECES + || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (tmode, align)) + break; + + align = MAX (align, GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (xmode)); + } + + /* First move what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to + successively smaller modes. */ + + while (max_size > 1) + { + for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT); + tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode)) + if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size) + mode = tmode; + + if (mode == VOIDmode) + break; + + icode = mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code; + if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing && align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)) + move_by_pieces_1 (GEN_FCN (icode), mode, &data); + + max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode); + } + + /* The code above should have handled everything. */ + gcc_assert (!data.len); + + if (endp) + { + rtx to1; + + gcc_assert (!data.reverse); + if (data.autinc_to) + { + if (endp == 2) + { + if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data.explicit_inc_to > 0) + emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data.to_addr, constm1_rtx)); + else + data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (data.to_addr, + -1)); + } + to1 = adjust_automodify_address (data.to, QImode, data.to_addr, + data.offset); + } + else + { + if (endp == 2) + --data.offset; + to1 = adjust_address (data.to, QImode, data.offset); + } + return to1; + } + else + return data.to; +} + +/* Return number of insns required to move L bytes by pieces. + ALIGN (in bits) is maximum alignment we can assume. */ + +static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT +move_by_pieces_ninsns (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT l, unsigned int align, + unsigned int max_size) +{ + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT n_insns = 0; + enum machine_mode tmode; + + tmode = mode_for_size (MOVE_MAX_PIECES * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 1); + if (align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode)) + align = GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode); + else + { + enum machine_mode tmode, xmode; + + for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), xmode = tmode; + tmode != VOIDmode; + xmode = tmode, tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode)) + if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > MOVE_MAX_PIECES + || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (tmode, align)) + break; + + align = MAX (align, GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (xmode)); + } + + while (max_size > 1) + { + enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode; + enum insn_code icode; + + for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT); + tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode)) + if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size) + mode = tmode; + + if (mode == VOIDmode) + break; + + icode = mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code; + if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing && align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)) + n_insns += l / GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), l %= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode); + + max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode); + } + + gcc_assert (!l); + return n_insns; +} + +/* Subroutine of move_by_pieces. Move as many bytes as appropriate + with move instructions for mode MODE. GENFUN is the gen_... function + to make a move insn for that mode. DATA has all the other info. */ + +static void +move_by_pieces_1 (rtx (*genfun) (rtx, ...), enum machine_mode mode, + struct move_by_pieces *data) +{ + unsigned int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode); + rtx to1 = NULL_RTX, from1; + + while (data->len >= size) + { + if (data->reverse) + data->offset -= size; + + if (data->to) + { + if (data->autinc_to) + to1 = adjust_automodify_address (data->to, mode, data->to_addr, + data->offset); + else + to1 = adjust_address (data->to, mode, data->offset); + } + + if (data->autinc_from) + from1 = adjust_automodify_address (data->from, mode, data->from_addr, + data->offset); + else + from1 = adjust_address (data->from, mode, data->offset); + + if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT && data->explicit_inc_to < 0) + emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr, + GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT)size))); + if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT && data->explicit_inc_from < 0) + emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->from_addr, + GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT)size))); + + if (data->to) + emit_insn ((*genfun) (to1, from1)); + else + { +#ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING + emit_single_push_insn (mode, from1, NULL); +#else + gcc_unreachable (); +#endif + } + + if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data->explicit_inc_to > 0) + emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr, GEN_INT (size))); + if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data->explicit_inc_from > 0) + emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->from_addr, GEN_INT (size))); + + if (! data->reverse) + data->offset += size; + + data->len -= size; + } +} + +/* Emit code to move a block Y to a block X. This may be done with + string-move instructions, with multiple scalar move instructions, + or with a library call. + + Both X and Y must be MEM rtx's (perhaps inside VOLATILE) with mode BLKmode. + SIZE is an rtx that says how long they are. + ALIGN is the maximum alignment we can assume they have. + METHOD describes what kind of copy this is, and what mechanisms may be used. + + Return the address of the new block, if memcpy is called and returns it, + 0 otherwise. */ + +rtx +emit_block_move (rtx x, rtx y, rtx size, enum block_op_methods method) +{ + bool may_use_call; + rtx retval = 0; + unsigned int align; + + switch (method) + { + case BLOCK_OP_NORMAL: + case BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL: + may_use_call = true; + break; + + case BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM: + may_use_call = block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm (); + + /* Make inhibit_defer_pop nonzero around the library call + to force it to pop the arguments right away. */ + NO_DEFER_POP; + break; + + case BLOCK_OP_NO_LIBCALL: + may_use_call = false; + break; + + default: + gcc_unreachable (); + } + + align = MIN (MEM_ALIGN (x), MEM_ALIGN (y)); + + gcc_assert (MEM_P (x)); + gcc_assert (MEM_P (y)); + gcc_assert (size); + + /* Make sure we've got BLKmode addresses; store_one_arg can decide that + block copy is more efficient for other large modes, e.g. DCmode. */ + x = adjust_address (x, BLKmode, 0); + y = adjust_address (y, BLKmode, 0); + + /* Set MEM_SIZE as appropriate for this block copy. The main place this + can be incorrect is coming from __builtin_memcpy. */ + if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT) + { + if (INTVAL (size) == 0) + return 0; + + x = shallow_copy_rtx (x); + y = shallow_copy_rtx (y); + set_mem_size (x, size); + set_mem_size (y, size); + } + + if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT && MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (INTVAL (size), align)) + move_by_pieces (x, y, INTVAL (size), align, 0); + else if (emit_block_move_via_movmem (x, y, size, align)) + ; + else if (may_use_call) + retval = emit_block_move_via_libcall (x, y, size, + method == BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL); + else + emit_block_move_via_loop (x, y, size, align); + + if (method == BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM) + OK_DEFER_POP; + + return retval; +} + +/* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Returns true if calling the + block move libcall will not clobber any parameters which may have + already been placed on the stack. */ + +static bool +block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm (void) +{ + /* If arguments are pushed on the stack, then they're safe. */ + if (PUSH_ARGS) + return true; + + /* If registers go on the stack anyway, any argument is sure to clobber + an outgoing argument. */ +#if defined (REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE) && defined (OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE) + { + tree fn = emit_block_move_libcall_fn (false); + (void) fn; + if (REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (fn) != 0) + return false; + } +#endif + + /* If any argument goes in memory, then it might clobber an outgoing + argument. */ + { + CUMULATIVE_ARGS args_so_far; + tree fn, arg; + + fn = emit_block_move_libcall_fn (false); + INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (args_so_far, TREE_TYPE (fn), NULL_RTX, 0, 3); + + arg = TYPE_ARG_TYPES (TREE_TYPE (fn)); + for ( ; arg != void_list_node ; arg = TREE_CHAIN (arg)) + { + enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_VALUE (arg)); + rtx tmp = FUNCTION_ARG (args_so_far, mode, NULL_TREE, 1); + if (!tmp || !REG_P (tmp)) + return false; + if (targetm.calls.arg_partial_bytes (&args_so_far, mode, NULL, 1)) + return false; + FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE (args_so_far, mode, NULL_TREE, 1); + } + } + return true; +} + +/* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Expand a movmem pattern; + return true if successful. */ + +static bool +emit_block_move_via_movmem (rtx x, rtx y, rtx size, unsigned int align) +{ + rtx opalign = GEN_INT (align / BITS_PER_UNIT); + int save_volatile_ok = volatile_ok; + enum machine_mode mode; + + /* Since this is a move insn, we don't care about volatility. */ + volatile_ok = 1; + + /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point + including more than one in the machine description unless + the more limited one has some advantage. */ + + for (mode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT); mode != VOIDmode; + mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode)) + { + enum insn_code code = movmem_optab[(int) mode]; + insn_operand_predicate_fn pred; + + if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing + /* We don't need MODE to be narrower than BITS_PER_HOST_WIDE_INT + here because if SIZE is less than the mode mask, as it is + returned by the macro, it will definitely be less than the + actual mode mask. */ + && ((GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT + && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) INTVAL (size) + <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1))) + || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) >= BITS_PER_WORD) + && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[0].predicate) == 0 + || (*pred) (x, BLKmode)) + && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[1].predicate) == 0 + || (*pred) (y, BLKmode)) + && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[3].predicate) == 0 + || (*pred) (opalign, VOIDmode))) + { + rtx op2; + rtx last = get_last_insn (); + rtx pat; + + op2 = convert_to_mode (mode, size, 1); + pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[2].predicate; + if (pred != 0 && ! (*pred) (op2, mode)) + op2 = copy_to_mode_reg (mode, op2); + + /* ??? When called via emit_block_move_for_call, it'd be + nice if there were some way to inform the backend, so + that it doesn't fail the expansion because it thinks + emitting the libcall would be more efficient. */ + + pat = GEN_FCN ((int) code) (x, y, op2, opalign); + if (pat) + { + emit_insn (pat); + volatile_ok = save_volatile_ok; + return true; + } + else + delete_insns_since (last); + } + } + + volatile_ok = save_volatile_ok; + return false; +} + +/* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Expand a call to memcpy. + Return the return value from memcpy, 0 otherwise. */ + +static rtx +emit_block_move_via_libcall (rtx dst, rtx src, rtx size, bool tailcall) +{ + rtx dst_addr, src_addr; + tree call_expr, arg_list, fn, src_tree, dst_tree, size_tree; + enum machine_mode size_mode; + rtx retval; + + /* Emit code to copy the addresses of DST and SRC and SIZE into new + pseudos. We can then place those new pseudos into a VAR_DECL and + use them later. */ + + dst_addr = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (dst, 0)); + src_addr = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (src, 0)); + + dst_addr = convert_memory_address (ptr_mode, dst_addr); + src_addr = convert_memory_address (ptr_mode, src_addr); + + dst_tree = make_tree (ptr_type_node, dst_addr); + src_tree = make_tree (ptr_type_node, src_addr); + + size_mode = TYPE_MODE (sizetype); + + size = convert_to_mode (size_mode, size, 1); + size = copy_to_mode_reg (size_mode, size); + + /* It is incorrect to use the libcall calling conventions to call + memcpy in this context. This could be a user call to memcpy and + the user may wish to examine the return value from memcpy. For + targets where libcalls and normal calls have different conventions + for returning pointers, we could end up generating incorrect code. */ + + size_tree = make_tree (sizetype, size); + + fn = emit_block_move_libcall_fn (true); + arg_list = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, size_tree, NULL_TREE); + arg_list = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, src_tree, arg_list); + arg_list = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, dst_tree, arg_list); + + /* Now we have to build up the CALL_EXPR itself. */ + call_expr = build1 (ADDR_EXPR, build_pointer_type (TREE_TYPE (fn)), fn); + call_expr = build3 (CALL_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (fn)), + call_expr, arg_list, NULL_TREE); + CALL_EXPR_TAILCALL (call_expr) = tailcall; + + retval = expand_normal (call_expr); + + return retval; +} + +/* A subroutine of emit_block_move_via_libcall. Create the tree node + for the function we use for block copies. The first time FOR_CALL + is true, we call assemble_external. */ + +static GTY(()) tree block_move_fn; + +void +init_block_move_fn (const char *asmspec) +{ + if (!block_move_fn) + { + tree args, fn; + + fn = get_identifier ("memcpy"); + args = build_function_type_list (ptr_type_node, ptr_type_node, + const_ptr_type_node, sizetype, + NULL_TREE); + + fn = build_decl (FUNCTION_DECL, fn, args); + DECL_EXTERNAL (fn) = 1; + TREE_PUBLIC (fn) = 1; + DECL_ARTIFICIAL (fn) = 1; + TREE_NOTHROW (fn) = 1; + DECL_VISIBILITY (fn) = VISIBILITY_DEFAULT; + DECL_VISIBILITY_SPECIFIED (fn) = 1; + + block_move_fn = fn; + } + + if (asmspec) + set_user_assembler_name (block_move_fn, asmspec); +} + +static tree +emit_block_move_libcall_fn (int for_call) +{ + static bool emitted_extern; + + if (!block_move_fn) + init_block_move_fn (NULL); + + if (for_call && !emitted_extern) + { + emitted_extern = true; + make_decl_rtl (block_move_fn); + assemble_external (block_move_fn); + } + + return block_move_fn; +} + +/* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Copy the data via an explicit + loop. This is used only when libcalls are forbidden. */ +/* ??? It'd be nice to copy in hunks larger than QImode. */ + +static void +emit_block_move_via_loop (rtx x, rtx y, rtx size, + unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) +{ + rtx cmp_label, top_label, iter, x_addr, y_addr, tmp; + enum machine_mode iter_mode; + + iter_mode = GET_MODE (size); + if (iter_mode == VOIDmode) + iter_mode = word_mode; + + top_label = gen_label_rtx (); + cmp_label = gen_label_rtx (); + iter = gen_reg_rtx (iter_mode); + + emit_move_insn (iter, const0_rtx); + + x_addr = force_operand (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX); + y_addr = force_operand (XEXP (y, 0), NULL_RTX); + do_pending_stack_adjust (); + + emit_jump (cmp_label); + emit_label (top_label); + + tmp = convert_modes (Pmode, iter_mode, iter, true); + x_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, x_addr, tmp); + y_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, y_addr, tmp); + x = change_address (x, QImode, x_addr); + y = change_address (y, QImode, y_addr); + + emit_move_insn (x, y); + + tmp = expand_simple_binop (iter_mode, PLUS, iter, const1_rtx, iter, + true, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN); + if (tmp != iter) + emit_move_insn (iter, tmp); + + emit_label (cmp_label); + + emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (iter, size, LT, NULL_RTX, iter_mode, + true, top_label); +} + +/* Copy all or part of a value X into registers starting at REGNO. + The number of registers to be filled is NREGS. */ + +void +move_block_to_reg (int regno, rtx x, int nregs, enum machine_mode mode) +{ + int i; +#ifdef HAVE_load_multiple + rtx pat; + rtx last; +#endif + + if (nregs == 0) + return; + + if (CONSTANT_P (x) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (x)) + x = validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode, x)); + + /* See if the machine can do this with a load multiple insn. */ +#ifdef HAVE_load_multiple + if (HAVE_load_multiple) + { + last = get_last_insn (); + pat = gen_load_multiple (gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno), x, + GEN_INT (nregs)); + if (pat) + { + emit_insn (pat); + return; + } + else + delete_insns_since (last); + } +#endif + + for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++) + emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno + i), + operand_subword_force (x, i, mode)); +} + +/* Copy all or part of a BLKmode value X out of registers starting at REGNO. + The number of registers to be filled is NREGS. */ + +void +move_block_from_reg (int regno, rtx x, int nregs) +{ + int i; + + if (nregs == 0) + return; + + /* See if the machine can do this with a store multiple insn. */ +#ifdef HAVE_store_multiple + if (HAVE_store_multiple) + { + rtx last = get_last_insn (); + rtx pat = gen_store_multiple (x, gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno), + GEN_INT (nregs)); + if (pat) + { + emit_insn (pat); + return; + } + else + delete_insns_since (last); + } +#endif + + for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++) + { + rtx tem = operand_subword (x, i, 1, BLKmode); + + gcc_assert (tem); + + emit_move_insn (tem, gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno + i)); + } +} + +/* Generate a PARALLEL rtx for a new non-consecutive group of registers from + ORIG, where ORIG is a non-consecutive group of registers represented by + a PARALLEL. The clone is identical to the original except in that the + original set of registers is replaced by a new set of pseudo registers. + The new set has the same modes as the original set. */ + +rtx +gen_group_rtx (rtx orig) +{ + int i, length; + rtx *tmps; + + gcc_assert (GET_CODE (orig) == PARALLEL); + + length = XVECLEN (orig, 0); + tmps = alloca (sizeof (rtx) * length); + + /* Skip a NULL entry in first slot. */ + i = XEXP (XVECEXP (orig, 0, 0), 0) ? 0 : 1; + + if (i) + tmps[0] = 0; + + for (; i < length; i++) + { + enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (orig, 0, i), 0)); + rtx offset = XEXP (XVECEXP (orig, 0, i), 1); + + tmps[i] = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, gen_reg_rtx (mode), offset); + } + + return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (orig), gen_rtvec_v (length, tmps)); +} + +/* A subroutine of emit_group_load. Arguments as for emit_group_load, + except that values are placed in TMPS[i], and must later be moved + into corresponding XEXP (XVECEXP (DST, 0, i), 0) element. */ + +static void +emit_group_load_1 (rtx *tmps, rtx dst, rtx orig_src, tree type, int ssize) +{ + rtx src; + int start, i; + enum machine_mode m = GET_MODE (orig_src); + + gcc_assert (GET_CODE (dst) == PARALLEL); + + if (m != VOIDmode + && !SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (m) + && !MEM_P (orig_src) + && GET_CODE (orig_src) != CONCAT) + { + enum machine_mode imode = int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (orig_src)); + if (imode == BLKmode) + src = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (orig_src), ssize, 0); + else + src = gen_reg_rtx (imode); + if (imode != BLKmode) + src = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (orig_src), src); + emit_move_insn (src, orig_src); + /* ...and back again. */ + if (imode != BLKmode) + src = gen_lowpart (imode, src); + emit_group_load_1 (tmps, dst, src, type, ssize); + return; + } + + /* Check for a NULL entry, used to indicate that the parameter goes + both on the stack and in registers. */ + if (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, 0), 0)) + start = 0; + else + start = 1; + + /* Process the pieces. */ + for (i = start; i < XVECLEN (dst, 0); i++) + { + enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, i), 0)); + HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos = INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, i), 1)); + unsigned int bytelen = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode); + int shift = 0; + + /* Handle trailing fragments that run over the size of the struct. */ + if (ssize >= 0 && bytepos + (HOST_WIDE_INT) bytelen > ssize) + { + /* Arrange to shift the fragment to where it belongs. + extract_bit_field loads to the lsb of the reg. */ + if ( +#ifdef BLOCK_REG_PADDING + BLOCK_REG_PADDING (GET_MODE (orig_src), type, i == start) + == (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN ? upward : downward) +#else + BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN +#endif + ) + shift = (bytelen - (ssize - bytepos)) * BITS_PER_UNIT; + bytelen = ssize - bytepos; + gcc_assert (bytelen > 0); + } + + /* If we won't be loading directly from memory, protect the real source + from strange tricks we might play; but make sure that the source can + be loaded directly into the destination. */ + src = orig_src; + if (!MEM_P (orig_src) + && (!CONSTANT_P (orig_src) + || (GET_MODE (orig_src) != mode + && GET_MODE (orig_src) != VOIDmode))) + { + if (GET_MODE (orig_src) == VOIDmode) + src = gen_reg_rtx (mode); + else + src = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (orig_src)); + + emit_move_insn (src, orig_src); + } + + /* Optimize the access just a bit. */ + if (MEM_P (src) + && (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode, MEM_ALIGN (src)) + || MEM_ALIGN (src) >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)) + && bytepos * BITS_PER_UNIT % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) == 0 + && bytelen == GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)) + { + tmps[i] = gen_reg_rtx (mode); + emit_move_insn (tmps[i], adjust_address (src, mode, bytepos)); + } + else if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode) + && GET_MODE (src) == mode + && bytelen == GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)) + /* Let emit_move_complex do the bulk of the work. */ + tmps[i] = src; + else if (GET_CODE (src) == CONCAT) + { + unsigned int slen = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)); + unsigned int slen0 = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (src, 0))); + + if ((bytepos == 0 && bytelen == slen0) + || (bytepos != 0 && bytepos + bytelen <= slen)) + { + /* The following assumes that the concatenated objects all + have the same size. In this case, a simple calculation + can be used to determine the object and the bit field + to be extracted. */ + tmps[i] = XEXP (src, bytepos / slen0); + if (! CONSTANT_P (tmps[i]) + && (!REG_P (tmps[i]) || GET_MODE (tmps[i]) != mode)) + tmps[i] = extract_bit_field (tmps[i], bytelen * BITS_PER_UNIT, + (bytepos % slen0) * BITS_PER_UNIT, + 1, NULL_RTX, mode, mode); + } + else + { + rtx mem; + + gcc_assert (!bytepos); + mem = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (src), slen, 0); + emit_move_insn (mem, src); + tmps[i] = extract_bit_field (mem, bytelen * BITS_PER_UNIT, + 0, 1, NULL_RTX, mode, mode); + } + } + /* FIXME: A SIMD parallel will eventually lead to a subreg of a + SIMD register, which is currently broken. While we get GCC + to emit proper RTL for these cases, let's dump to memory. */ + else if (VECTOR_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dst)) + && REG_P (src)) + { + int slen = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)); + rtx mem; + + mem = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (src), slen, 0); + emit_move_insn (mem, src); + tmps[i] = adjust_address (mem, mode, (int) bytepos); + } + else if (CONSTANT_P (src) && GET_MODE (dst) != BLKmode + && XVECLEN (dst, 0) > 1) + tmps[i] = simplify_gen_subreg (mode, src, GET_MODE(dst), bytepos); + else if (CONSTANT_P (src) + || (REG_P (src) && GET_MODE (src) == mode)) + tmps[i] = src; + else + tmps[i] = extract_bit_field (src, bytelen * BITS_PER_UNIT, + bytepos * BITS_PER_UNIT, 1, NULL_RTX, + mode, mode); + + if (shift) + tmps[i] = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, mode, tmps[i], + build_int_cst (NULL_TREE, shift), tmps[i], 0); + } +} + +/* Emit code to move a block SRC of type TYPE to a block DST, + where DST is non-consecutive registers represented by a PARALLEL. + SSIZE represents the total size of block ORIG_SRC in bytes, or -1 + if not known. */ + +void +emit_group_load (rtx dst, rtx src, tree type, int ssize) +{ + rtx *tmps; + int i; + + tmps = alloca (sizeof (rtx) * XVECLEN (dst, 0)); + emit_group_load_1 (tmps, dst, src, type, ssize); + + /* Copy the extracted pieces into the proper (probable) hard regs. */ + for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (dst, 0); i++) + { + rtx d = XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, i), 0); + if (d == NULL) + continue; + emit_move_insn (d, tmps[i]); + } +} + +/* Similar, but load SRC into new pseudos in a format that looks like + PARALLEL. This can later be fed to emit_group_move to get things + in the right place. */ + +rtx +emit_group_load_into_temps (rtx parallel, rtx src, tree type, int ssize) +{ + rtvec vec; + int i; + + vec = rtvec_alloc (XVECLEN (parallel, 0)); + emit_group_load_1 (&RTVEC_ELT (vec, 0), parallel, src, type, ssize); + + /* Convert the vector to look just like the original PARALLEL, except + with the computed values. */ + for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (parallel, 0); i++) + { + rtx e = XVECEXP (parallel, 0, i); + rtx d = XEXP (e, 0); + + if (d) + { + d = force_reg (GET_MODE (d), RTVEC_ELT (vec, i)); + e = alloc_EXPR_LIST (REG_NOTE_KIND (e), d, XEXP (e, 1)); + } + RTVEC_ELT (vec, i) = e; + } + + return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (parallel), vec); +} + +/* Emit code to move a block SRC to block DST, where SRC and DST are + non-consecutive groups of registers, each represented by a PARALLEL. */ + +void +emit_group_move (rtx dst, rtx src) +{ + int i; + + gcc_assert (GET_CODE (src) == PARALLEL + && GET_CODE (dst) == PARALLEL + && XVECLEN (src, 0) == XVECLEN (dst, 0)); + + /* Skip first entry if NULL. */ + for (i = XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, 0), 0) ? 0 : 1; i < XVECLEN (src, 0); i++) + emit_move_insn (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, i), 0), + XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, i), 0)); +} + +/* Move a group of registers represented by a PARALLEL into pseudos. */ + +rtx +emit_group_move_into_temps (rtx src) +{ + rtvec vec = rtvec_alloc (XVECLEN (src, 0)); + int i; + + for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (src, 0); i++) + { + rtx e = XVECEXP (src, 0, i); + rtx d = XEXP (e, 0); + + if (d) + e = alloc_EXPR_LIST (REG_NOTE_KIND (e), copy_to_reg (d), XEXP (e, 1)); + RTVEC_ELT (vec, i) = e; + } + + return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (src), vec); +} + +/* Emit code to move a block SRC to a block ORIG_DST of type TYPE, + where SRC is non-consecutive registers represented by a PARALLEL. + SSIZE represents the total size of block ORIG_DST, or -1 if not + known. */ + +void +emit_group_store (rtx orig_dst, rtx src, tree type ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, int ssize) +{ + rtx *tmps, dst; + int start, finish, i; + enum machine_mode m = GET_MODE (orig_dst); + + gcc_assert (GET_CODE (src) == PARALLEL); + + if (!SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (m) + && !MEM_P (orig_dst) && GET_CODE (orig_dst) != CONCAT) + { + enum machine_mode imode = int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (orig_dst)); + if (imode == BLKmode) + dst = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (orig_dst), ssize, 0); + else + dst = gen_reg_rtx (imode); + emit_group_store (dst, src, type, ssize); + if (imode != BLKmode) + dst = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (orig_dst), dst); + emit_move_insn (orig_dst, dst); + return; + } + + /* Check for a NULL entry, used to indicate that the parameter goes + both on the stack and in registers. */ + if (XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, 0), 0)) + start = 0; + else + start = 1; + finish = XVECLEN (src, 0); + + tmps = alloca (sizeof (rtx) * finish); + + /* Copy the (probable) hard regs into pseudos. */ + for (i = start; i < finish; i++) + { + rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, i), 0); + if (!REG_P (reg) || REGNO (reg) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) + { + tmps[i] = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (reg)); + emit_move_insn (tmps[i], reg); + } + else + tmps[i] = reg; + } + + /* If we won't be storing directly into memory, protect the real destination + from strange tricks we might play. */ + dst = orig_dst; + if (GET_CODE (dst) == PARALLEL) + { + rtx temp; + + /* We can get a PARALLEL dst if there is a conditional expression in + a return statement. In that case, the dst and src are the same, + so no action is necessary. */ + if (rtx_equal_p (dst, src)) + return; + + /* It is unclear if we can ever reach here, but we may as well handle + it. Allocate a temporary, and split this into a store/load to/from + the temporary. */ + + temp = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (dst), ssize, 0); + emit_group_store (temp, src, type, ssize); + emit_group_load (dst, temp, type, ssize); + return; + } + else if (!MEM_P (dst) && GET_CODE (dst) != CONCAT) + { + enum machine_mode outer = GET_MODE (dst); + enum machine_mode inner; + HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos; + bool done = false; + rtx temp; + + if (!REG_P (dst) || REGNO (dst) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) + dst = gen_reg_rtx (outer); + + /* Make life a bit easier for combine. */ + /* If the first element of the vector is the low part + of the destination mode, use a paradoxical subreg to + initialize the destination. */ + if (start < finish) + { + inner = GET_MODE (tmps[start]); + bytepos = subreg_lowpart_offset (inner, outer); + if (INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, start), 1)) == bytepos) + { + temp = simplify_gen_subreg (outer, tmps[start], + inner, 0); + if (temp) + { + emit_move_insn (dst, temp); + done = true; + start++; + } + } + } + + /* If the first element wasn't the low part, try the last. */ + if (!done + && start < finish - 1) + { + inner = GET_MODE (tmps[finish - 1]); + bytepos = subreg_lowpart_offset (inner, outer); + if (INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, finish - 1), 1)) == bytepos) + { + temp = simplify_gen_subreg (outer, tmps[finish - 1], + inner, 0); + if (temp) + { + emit_move_insn (dst, temp); + done = true; + finish--; + } + } + } + + /* Otherwise, simply initialize the result to zero. */ + if (!done) + emit_move_insn (dst, CONST0_RTX (outer)); + } + + /* Process the pieces. */ + for (i = start; i < finish; i++) + { + HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos = INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, i), 1)); + enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (tmps[i]); + unsigned int bytelen = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode); + rtx dest = dst; + + /* Handle trailing fragments that run over the size of the struct. */ + if (ssize >= 0 && bytepos + (HOST_WIDE_INT) bytelen > ssize) + { + /* store_bit_field always takes its value from the lsb. + Move the fragment to the lsb if it's not already there. */ + if ( +#ifdef BLOCK_REG_PADDING + BLOCK_REG_PADDING (GET_MODE (orig_dst), type, i == start) + == (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN ? upward : downward) +#else + BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN +#endif + ) + { + int shift = (bytelen - (ssize - bytepos)) * BITS_PER_UNIT; + tmps[i] = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, mode, tmps[i], + build_int_cst (NULL_TREE, shift), + tmps[i], 0); + } + bytelen = ssize - bytepos; + } + + if (GET_CODE (dst) == CONCAT) + { + if (bytepos + bytelen <= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst, 0)))) + dest = XEXP (dst, 0); + else if (bytepos >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst, 0)))) + { + bytepos -= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst, 0))); + dest = XEXP (dst, 1); + } + else + { + gcc_assert (bytepos == 0 && XVECLEN (src, 0)); + dest = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (dest), + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)), 0); + emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dest, GET_MODE (tmps[i]), bytepos), + tmps[i]); + dst = dest; + break; + } + } + + /* Optimize the access just a bit. */ + if (MEM_P (dest) + && (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode, MEM_ALIGN (dest)) + || MEM_ALIGN (dest) >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)) + && bytepos * BITS_PER_UNIT % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) == 0 + && bytelen == GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)) + emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dest, mode, bytepos), tmps[i]); + else + store_bit_field (dest, bytelen * BITS_PER_UNIT, bytepos * BITS_PER_UNIT, + mode, tmps[i]); + } + + /* Copy from the pseudo into the (probable) hard reg. */ + if (orig_dst != dst) + emit_move_insn (orig_dst, dst); +} + +/* Generate code to copy a BLKmode object of TYPE out of a + set of registers starting with SRCREG into TGTBLK. If TGTBLK + is null, a stack temporary is created. TGTBLK is returned. + + The purpose of this routine is to handle functions that return + BLKmode structures in registers. Some machines (the PA for example) + want to return all small structures in registers regardless of the + structure's alignment. */ + +rtx +copy_blkmode_from_reg (rtx tgtblk, rtx srcreg, tree type) +{ + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bytes = int_size_in_bytes (type); + rtx src = NULL, dst = NULL; + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize = MIN (TYPE_ALIGN (type), BITS_PER_WORD); + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos, xbitpos, padding_correction = 0; + + if (tgtblk == 0) + { + tgtblk = assign_temp (build_qualified_type (type, + (TYPE_QUALS (type) + | TYPE_QUAL_CONST)), + 0, 1, 1); + preserve_temp_slots (tgtblk); + } + + /* This code assumes srcreg is at least a full word. If it isn't, copy it + into a new pseudo which is a full word. */ + + if (GET_MODE (srcreg) != BLKmode + && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (srcreg)) < UNITS_PER_WORD) + srcreg = convert_to_mode (word_mode, srcreg, TYPE_UNSIGNED (type)); + + /* If the structure doesn't take up a whole number of words, see whether + SRCREG is padded on the left or on the right. If it's on the left, + set PADDING_CORRECTION to the number of bits to skip. + + In most ABIs, the structure will be returned at the least end of + the register, which translates to right padding on little-endian + targets and left padding on big-endian targets. The opposite + holds if the structure is returned at the most significant + end of the register. */ + if (bytes % UNITS_PER_WORD != 0 + && (targetm.calls.return_in_msb (type) + ? !BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN + : BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)) + padding_correction + = (BITS_PER_WORD - ((bytes % UNITS_PER_WORD) * BITS_PER_UNIT)); + + /* Copy the structure BITSIZE bites at a time. + + We could probably emit more efficient code for machines which do not use + strict alignment, but it doesn't seem worth the effort at the current + time. */ + for (bitpos = 0, xbitpos = padding_correction; + bitpos < bytes * BITS_PER_UNIT; + bitpos += bitsize, xbitpos += bitsize) + { + /* We need a new source operand each time xbitpos is on a + word boundary and when xbitpos == padding_correction + (the first time through). */ + if (xbitpos % BITS_PER_WORD == 0 + || xbitpos == padding_correction) + src = operand_subword_force (srcreg, xbitpos / BITS_PER_WORD, + GET_MODE (srcreg)); + + /* We need a new destination operand each time bitpos is on + a word boundary. */ + if (bitpos % BITS_PER_WORD == 0) + dst = operand_subword (tgtblk, bitpos / BITS_PER_WORD, 1, BLKmode); + + /* Use xbitpos for the source extraction (right justified) and + xbitpos for the destination store (left justified). */ + store_bit_field (dst, bitsize, bitpos % BITS_PER_WORD, word_mode, + extract_bit_field (src, bitsize, + xbitpos % BITS_PER_WORD, 1, + NULL_RTX, word_mode, word_mode)); + } + + return tgtblk; +} + +/* Add a USE expression for REG to the (possibly empty) list pointed + to by CALL_FUSAGE. REG must denote a hard register. */ + +void +use_reg (rtx *call_fusage, rtx reg) +{ + gcc_assert (REG_P (reg) && REGNO (reg) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER); + + *call_fusage + = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, + gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, reg), *call_fusage); +} + +/* Add USE expressions to *CALL_FUSAGE for each of NREGS consecutive regs, + starting at REGNO. All of these registers must be hard registers. */ + +void +use_regs (rtx *call_fusage, int regno, int nregs) +{ + int i; + + gcc_assert (regno + nregs <= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER); + + for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++) + use_reg (call_fusage, regno_reg_rtx[regno + i]); +} + +/* Add USE expressions to *CALL_FUSAGE for each REG contained in the + PARALLEL REGS. This is for calls that pass values in multiple + non-contiguous locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */ + +void +use_group_regs (rtx *call_fusage, rtx regs) +{ + int i; + + for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (regs, 0); i++) + { + rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (regs, 0, i), 0); + + /* A NULL entry means the parameter goes both on the stack and in + registers. This can also be a MEM for targets that pass values + partially on the stack and partially in registers. */ + if (reg != 0 && REG_P (reg)) + use_reg (call_fusage, reg); + } +} + + +/* Determine whether the LEN bytes generated by CONSTFUN can be + stored to memory using several move instructions. CONSTFUNDATA is + a pointer which will be passed as argument in every CONSTFUN call. + ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. Return nonzero if a + call to store_by_pieces should succeed. */ + +int +can_store_by_pieces (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len, + rtx (*constfun) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode), + void *constfundata, unsigned int align) +{ + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT l; + unsigned int max_size; + HOST_WIDE_INT offset = 0; + enum machine_mode mode, tmode; + enum insn_code icode; + int reverse; + rtx cst; + + if (len == 0) + return 1; + + if (! STORE_BY_PIECES_P (len, align)) + return 0; + + tmode = mode_for_size (STORE_MAX_PIECES * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 1); + if (align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode)) + align = GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode); + else + { + enum machine_mode xmode; + + for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), xmode = tmode; + tmode != VOIDmode; + xmode = tmode, tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode)) + if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > STORE_MAX_PIECES + || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (tmode, align)) + break; + + align = MAX (align, GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (xmode)); + } + + /* We would first store what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to + successively smaller modes. */ + + for (reverse = 0; + reverse <= (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT || HAVE_POST_DECREMENT); + reverse++) + { + l = len; + mode = VOIDmode; + max_size = STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1; + while (max_size > 1) + { + for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT); + tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode)) + if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size) + mode = tmode; + + if (mode == VOIDmode) + break; + + icode = mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code; + if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing + && align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)) + { + unsigned int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode); + + while (l >= size) + { + if (reverse) + offset -= size; + + cst = (*constfun) (constfundata, offset, mode); + if (!LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (cst)) + return 0; + + if (!reverse) + offset += size; + + l -= size; + } + } + + max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode); + } + + /* The code above should have handled everything. */ + gcc_assert (!l); + } + + return 1; +} + +/* Generate several move instructions to store LEN bytes generated by + CONSTFUN to block TO. (A MEM rtx with BLKmode). CONSTFUNDATA is a + pointer which will be passed as argument in every CONSTFUN call. + ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. + If ENDP is 0 return to, if ENDP is 1 return memory at the end ala + mempcpy, and if ENDP is 2 return memory the end minus one byte ala + stpcpy. */ + +rtx +store_by_pieces (rtx to, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len, + rtx (*constfun) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode), + void *constfundata, unsigned int align, int endp) +{ + struct store_by_pieces data; + + if (len == 0) + { + gcc_assert (endp != 2); + return to; + } + + gcc_assert (STORE_BY_PIECES_P (len, align)); + data.constfun = constfun; + data.constfundata = constfundata; + data.len = len; + data.to = to; + store_by_pieces_1 (&data, align); + if (endp) + { + rtx to1; + + gcc_assert (!data.reverse); + if (data.autinc_to) + { + if (endp == 2) + { + if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data.explicit_inc_to > 0) + emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data.to_addr, constm1_rtx)); + else + data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (data.to_addr, + -1)); + } + to1 = adjust_automodify_address (data.to, QImode, data.to_addr, + data.offset); + } + else + { + if (endp == 2) + --data.offset; + to1 = adjust_address (data.to, QImode, data.offset); + } + return to1; + } + else + return data.to; +} + +/* Generate several move instructions to clear LEN bytes of block TO. (A MEM + rtx with BLKmode). ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. */ + +static void +clear_by_pieces (rtx to, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len, unsigned int align) +{ + struct store_by_pieces data; + + if (len == 0) + return; + + data.constfun = clear_by_pieces_1; + data.constfundata = NULL; + data.len = len; + data.to = to; + store_by_pieces_1 (&data, align); +} + +/* Callback routine for clear_by_pieces. + Return const0_rtx unconditionally. */ + +static rtx +clear_by_pieces_1 (void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, + HOST_WIDE_INT offset ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, + enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) +{ + return const0_rtx; +} + +/* Subroutine of clear_by_pieces and store_by_pieces. + Generate several move instructions to store LEN bytes of block TO. (A MEM + rtx with BLKmode). ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. */ + +static void +store_by_pieces_1 (struct store_by_pieces *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, + unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) +{ + rtx to_addr = XEXP (data->to, 0); + unsigned int max_size = STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1; + enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode, tmode; + enum insn_code icode; + + data->offset = 0; + data->to_addr = to_addr; + data->autinc_to + = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC + || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC); + + data->explicit_inc_to = 0; + data->reverse + = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC); + if (data->reverse) + data->offset = data->len; + + /* If storing requires more than two move insns, + copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter) + and use post-increment if available. */ + if (!data->autinc_to + && move_by_pieces_ninsns (data->len, align, max_size) > 2) + { + /* Determine the main mode we'll be using. */ + for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT); + tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode)) + if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size) + mode = tmode; + + if (USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (mode) && data->reverse && ! data->autinc_to) + { + data->to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (to_addr, data->len)); + data->autinc_to = 1; + data->explicit_inc_to = -1; + } + + if (USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (mode) && ! data->reverse + && ! data->autinc_to) + { + data->to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr); + data->autinc_to = 1; + data->explicit_inc_to = 1; + } + + if ( !data->autinc_to && CONSTANT_P (to_addr)) + data->to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr); + } + + tmode = mode_for_size (STORE_MAX_PIECES * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 1); + if (align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode)) + align = GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode); + else + { + enum machine_mode xmode; + + for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), xmode = tmode; + tmode != VOIDmode; + xmode = tmode, tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode)) + if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > STORE_MAX_PIECES + || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (tmode, align)) + break; + + align = MAX (align, GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (xmode)); + } + + /* First store what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to + successively smaller modes. */ + + while (max_size > 1) + { + for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT); + tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode)) + if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size) + mode = tmode; + + if (mode == VOIDmode) + break; + + icode = mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code; + if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing && align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)) + store_by_pieces_2 (GEN_FCN (icode), mode, data); + + max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode); + } + + /* The code above should have handled everything. */ + gcc_assert (!data->len); +} + +/* Subroutine of store_by_pieces_1. Store as many bytes as appropriate + with move instructions for mode MODE. GENFUN is the gen_... function + to make a move insn for that mode. DATA has all the other info. */ + +static void +store_by_pieces_2 (rtx (*genfun) (rtx, ...), enum machine_mode mode, + struct store_by_pieces *data) +{ + unsigned int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode); + rtx to1, cst; + + while (data->len >= size) + { + if (data->reverse) + data->offset -= size; + + if (data->autinc_to) + to1 = adjust_automodify_address (data->to, mode, data->to_addr, + data->offset); + else + to1 = adjust_address (data->to, mode, data->offset); + + if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT && data->explicit_inc_to < 0) + emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr, + GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT) size))); + + cst = (*data->constfun) (data->constfundata, data->offset, mode); + emit_insn ((*genfun) (to1, cst)); + + if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data->explicit_inc_to > 0) + emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr, GEN_INT (size))); + + if (! data->reverse) + data->offset += size; + + data->len -= size; + } +} + +/* Write zeros through the storage of OBJECT. If OBJECT has BLKmode, SIZE is + its length in bytes. */ + +rtx +clear_storage (rtx object, rtx size, enum block_op_methods method) +{ + enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (object); + unsigned int align; + + gcc_assert (method == BLOCK_OP_NORMAL || method == BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL); + + /* If OBJECT is not BLKmode and SIZE is the same size as its mode, + just move a zero. Otherwise, do this a piece at a time. */ + if (mode != BLKmode + && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT + && INTVAL (size) == (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)) + { + rtx zero = CONST0_RTX (mode); + if (zero != NULL) + { + emit_move_insn (object, zero); + return NULL; + } + + if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode)) + { + zero = CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE_INNER (mode)); + if (zero != NULL) + { + write_complex_part (object, zero, 0); + write_complex_part (object, zero, 1); + return NULL; + } + } + } + + if (size == const0_rtx) + return NULL; + + align = MEM_ALIGN (object); + + if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT + && CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P (INTVAL (size), align)) + clear_by_pieces (object, INTVAL (size), align); + else if (set_storage_via_setmem (object, size, const0_rtx, align)) + ; + else + return clear_storage_via_libcall (object, size, + method == BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL); + + return NULL; +} + +/* A subroutine of clear_storage. Expand a call to memset. + Return the return value of memset, 0 otherwise. */ + +static rtx +clear_storage_via_libcall (rtx object, rtx size, bool tailcall) +{ + tree call_expr, arg_list, fn, object_tree, size_tree; + enum machine_mode size_mode; + rtx retval; + + /* Emit code to copy OBJECT and SIZE into new pseudos. We can then + place those into new pseudos into a VAR_DECL and use them later. */ + + object = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (object, 0)); + + size_mode = TYPE_MODE (sizetype); + size = convert_to_mode (size_mode, size, 1); + size = copy_to_mode_reg (size_mode, size); + + /* It is incorrect to use the libcall calling conventions to call + memset in this context. This could be a user call to memset and + the user may wish to examine the return value from memset. For + targets where libcalls and normal calls have different conventions + for returning pointers, we could end up generating incorrect code. */ + + object_tree = make_tree (ptr_type_node, object); + size_tree = make_tree (sizetype, size); + + fn = clear_storage_libcall_fn (true); + arg_list = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, size_tree, NULL_TREE); + arg_list = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, integer_zero_node, arg_list); + arg_list = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, object_tree, arg_list); + + /* Now we have to build up the CALL_EXPR itself. */ + call_expr = build1 (ADDR_EXPR, build_pointer_type (TREE_TYPE (fn)), fn); + call_expr = build3 (CALL_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (fn)), + call_expr, arg_list, NULL_TREE); + CALL_EXPR_TAILCALL (call_expr) = tailcall; + + retval = expand_normal (call_expr); + + return retval; +} + +/* A subroutine of clear_storage_via_libcall. Create the tree node + for the function we use for block clears. The first time FOR_CALL + is true, we call assemble_external. */ + +static GTY(()) tree block_clear_fn; + +void +init_block_clear_fn (const char *asmspec) +{ + if (!block_clear_fn) + { + tree fn, args; + + fn = get_identifier ("memset"); + args = build_function_type_list (ptr_type_node, ptr_type_node, + integer_type_node, sizetype, + NULL_TREE); + + fn = build_decl (FUNCTION_DECL, fn, args); + DECL_EXTERNAL (fn) = 1; + TREE_PUBLIC (fn) = 1; + DECL_ARTIFICIAL (fn) = 1; + TREE_NOTHROW (fn) = 1; + DECL_VISIBILITY (fn) = VISIBILITY_DEFAULT; + DECL_VISIBILITY_SPECIFIED (fn) = 1; + + block_clear_fn = fn; + } + + if (asmspec) + set_user_assembler_name (block_clear_fn, asmspec); +} + +static tree +clear_storage_libcall_fn (int for_call) +{ + static bool emitted_extern; + + if (!block_clear_fn) + init_block_clear_fn (NULL); + + if (for_call && !emitted_extern) + { + emitted_extern = true; + make_decl_rtl (block_clear_fn); + assemble_external (block_clear_fn); + } + + return block_clear_fn; +} + +/* Expand a setmem pattern; return true if successful. */ + +bool +set_storage_via_setmem (rtx object, rtx size, rtx val, unsigned int align) +{ + /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point + including more than one in the machine description unless + the more limited one has some advantage. */ + + rtx opalign = GEN_INT (align / BITS_PER_UNIT); + enum machine_mode mode; + + for (mode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT); mode != VOIDmode; + mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode)) + { + enum insn_code code = setmem_optab[(int) mode]; + insn_operand_predicate_fn pred; + + if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing + /* We don't need MODE to be narrower than + BITS_PER_HOST_WIDE_INT here because if SIZE is less than + the mode mask, as it is returned by the macro, it will + definitely be less than the actual mode mask. */ + && ((GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT + && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) INTVAL (size) + <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1))) + || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) >= BITS_PER_WORD) + && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[0].predicate) == 0 + || (*pred) (object, BLKmode)) + && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[3].predicate) == 0 + || (*pred) (opalign, VOIDmode))) + { + rtx opsize, opchar; + enum machine_mode char_mode; + rtx last = get_last_insn (); + rtx pat; + + opsize = convert_to_mode (mode, size, 1); + pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[1].predicate; + if (pred != 0 && ! (*pred) (opsize, mode)) + opsize = copy_to_mode_reg (mode, opsize); + + opchar = val; + char_mode = insn_data[(int) code].operand[2].mode; + if (char_mode != VOIDmode) + { + opchar = convert_to_mode (char_mode, opchar, 1); + pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[2].predicate; + if (pred != 0 && ! (*pred) (opchar, char_mode)) + opchar = copy_to_mode_reg (char_mode, opchar); + } + + pat = GEN_FCN ((int) code) (object, opsize, opchar, opalign); + if (pat) + { + emit_insn (pat); + return true; + } + else + delete_insns_since (last); + } + } + + return false; +} + + +/* Write to one of the components of the complex value CPLX. Write VAL to + the real part if IMAG_P is false, and the imaginary part if its true. */ + +static void +write_complex_part (rtx cplx, rtx val, bool imag_p) +{ + enum machine_mode cmode; + enum machine_mode imode; + unsigned ibitsize; + + if (GET_CODE (cplx) == CONCAT) + { + emit_move_insn (XEXP (cplx, imag_p), val); + return; + } + + cmode = GET_MODE (cplx); + imode = GET_MODE_INNER (cmode); + ibitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode); + + /* For MEMs simplify_gen_subreg may generate an invalid new address + because, e.g., the original address is considered mode-dependent + by the target, which restricts simplify_subreg from invoking + adjust_address_nv. Instead of preparing fallback support for an + invalid address, we call adjust_address_nv directly. */ + if (MEM_P (cplx)) + { + emit_move_insn (adjust_address_nv (cplx, imode, + imag_p ? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode) : 0), + val); + return; + } + + /* If the sub-object is at least word sized, then we know that subregging + will work. This special case is important, since store_bit_field + wants to operate on integer modes, and there's rarely an OImode to + correspond to TCmode. */ + if (ibitsize >= BITS_PER_WORD + /* For hard regs we have exact predicates. Assume we can split + the original object if it spans an even number of hard regs. + This special case is important for SCmode on 64-bit platforms + where the natural size of floating-point regs is 32-bit. */ + || (REG_P (cplx) + && REGNO (cplx) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER + && hard_regno_nregs[REGNO (cplx)][cmode] % 2 == 0)) + { + rtx part = simplify_gen_subreg (imode, cplx, cmode, + imag_p ? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode) : 0); + if (part) + { + emit_move_insn (part, val); + return; + } + else + /* simplify_gen_subreg may fail for sub-word MEMs. */ + gcc_assert (MEM_P (cplx) && ibitsize < BITS_PER_WORD); + } + + store_bit_field (cplx, ibitsize, imag_p ? ibitsize : 0, imode, val); +} + +/* Extract one of the components of the complex value CPLX. Extract the + real part if IMAG_P is false, and the imaginary part if it's true. */ + +static rtx +read_complex_part (rtx cplx, bool imag_p) +{ + enum machine_mode cmode, imode; + unsigned ibitsize; + + if (GET_CODE (cplx) == CONCAT) + return XEXP (cplx, imag_p); + + cmode = GET_MODE (cplx); + imode = GET_MODE_INNER (cmode); + ibitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode); + + /* Special case reads from complex constants that got spilled to memory. */ + if (MEM_P (cplx) && GET_CODE (XEXP (cplx, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF) + { + tree decl = SYMBOL_REF_DECL (XEXP (cplx, 0)); + if (decl && TREE_CODE (decl) == COMPLEX_CST) + { + tree part = imag_p ? TREE_IMAGPART (decl) : TREE_REALPART (decl); + if (CONSTANT_CLASS_P (part)) + return expand_expr (part, NULL_RTX, imode, EXPAND_NORMAL); + } + } + + /* For MEMs simplify_gen_subreg may generate an invalid new address + because, e.g., the original address is considered mode-dependent + by the target, which restricts simplify_subreg from invoking + adjust_address_nv. Instead of preparing fallback support for an + invalid address, we call adjust_address_nv directly. */ + if (MEM_P (cplx)) + return adjust_address_nv (cplx, imode, + imag_p ? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode) : 0); + + /* If the sub-object is at least word sized, then we know that subregging + will work. This special case is important, since extract_bit_field + wants to operate on integer modes, and there's rarely an OImode to + correspond to TCmode. */ + if (ibitsize >= BITS_PER_WORD + /* For hard regs we have exact predicates. Assume we can split + the original object if it spans an even number of hard regs. + This special case is important for SCmode on 64-bit platforms + where the natural size of floating-point regs is 32-bit. */ + || (REG_P (cplx) + && REGNO (cplx) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER + && hard_regno_nregs[REGNO (cplx)][cmode] % 2 == 0)) + { + rtx ret = simplify_gen_subreg (imode, cplx, cmode, + imag_p ? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode) : 0); + if (ret) + return ret; + else + /* simplify_gen_subreg may fail for sub-word MEMs. */ + gcc_assert (MEM_P (cplx) && ibitsize < BITS_PER_WORD); + } + + return extract_bit_field (cplx, ibitsize, imag_p ? ibitsize : 0, + true, NULL_RTX, imode, imode); +} + +/* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Yet another lowpart generator. + NEW_MODE and OLD_MODE are the same size. Return NULL if X cannot be + represented in NEW_MODE. If FORCE is true, this will never happen, as + we'll force-create a SUBREG if needed. */ + +static rtx +emit_move_change_mode (enum machine_mode new_mode, + enum machine_mode old_mode, rtx x, bool force) +{ + rtx ret; + + if (MEM_P (x)) + { + /* We don't have to worry about changing the address since the + size in bytes is supposed to be the same. */ + if (reload_in_progress) + { + /* Copy the MEM to change the mode and move any + substitutions from the old MEM to the new one. */ + ret = adjust_address_nv (x, new_mode, 0); + copy_replacements (x, ret); + } + else + ret = adjust_address (x, new_mode, 0); + } + else + { + /* Note that we do want simplify_subreg's behavior of validating + that the new mode is ok for a hard register. If we were to use + simplify_gen_subreg, we would create the subreg, but would + probably run into the target not being able to implement it. */ + /* Except, of course, when FORCE is true, when this is exactly what + we want. Which is needed for CCmodes on some targets. */ + if (force) + ret = simplify_gen_subreg (new_mode, x, old_mode, 0); + else + ret = simplify_subreg (new_mode, x, old_mode, 0); + } + + return ret; +} + +/* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X using + an integer mode of the same size as MODE. Returns the instruction + emitted, or NULL if such a move could not be generated. */ + +static rtx +emit_move_via_integer (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, rtx y, bool force) +{ + enum machine_mode imode; + enum insn_code code; + + /* There must exist a mode of the exact size we require. */ + imode = int_mode_for_mode (mode); + if (imode == BLKmode) + return NULL_RTX; + + /* The target must support moves in this mode. */ + code = mov_optab->handlers[imode].insn_code; + if (code == CODE_FOR_nothing) + return NULL_RTX; + + x = emit_move_change_mode (imode, mode, x, force); + if (x == NULL_RTX) + return NULL_RTX; + y = emit_move_change_mode (imode, mode, y, force); + if (y == NULL_RTX) + return NULL_RTX; + return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code) (x, y)); +} + +/* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. X is a push_operand in MODE. + Return an equivalent MEM that does not use an auto-increment. */ + +static rtx +emit_move_resolve_push (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x) +{ + enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)); + HOST_WIDE_INT adjust; + rtx temp; + + adjust = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode); +#ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING + adjust = PUSH_ROUNDING (adjust); +#endif + if (code == PRE_DEC || code == POST_DEC) + adjust = -adjust; + else if (code == PRE_MODIFY || code == POST_MODIFY) + { + rtx expr = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1); + HOST_WIDE_INT val; + + gcc_assert (GET_CODE (expr) == PLUS || GET_CODE (expr) == MINUS); + gcc_assert (GET_CODE (XEXP (expr, 1)) == CONST_INT); + val = INTVAL (XEXP (expr, 1)); + if (GET_CODE (expr) == MINUS) + val = -val; + gcc_assert (adjust == val || adjust == -val); + adjust = val; + } + + /* Do not use anti_adjust_stack, since we don't want to update + stack_pointer_delta. */ + temp = expand_simple_binop (Pmode, PLUS, stack_pointer_rtx, + GEN_INT (adjust), stack_pointer_rtx, + 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN); + if (temp != stack_pointer_rtx) + emit_move_insn (stack_pointer_rtx, temp); + + switch (code) + { + case PRE_INC: + case PRE_DEC: + case PRE_MODIFY: + temp = stack_pointer_rtx; + break; + case POST_INC: + case POST_DEC: + case POST_MODIFY: + temp = plus_constant (stack_pointer_rtx, -adjust); + break; + default: + gcc_unreachable (); + } + + return replace_equiv_address (x, temp); +} + +/* A subroutine of emit_move_complex. Generate a move from Y into X. + X is known to satisfy push_operand, and MODE is known to be complex. + Returns the last instruction emitted. */ + +static rtx +emit_move_complex_push (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, rtx y) +{ + enum machine_mode submode = GET_MODE_INNER (mode); + bool imag_first; + +#ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING + unsigned int submodesize = GET_MODE_SIZE (submode); + + /* In case we output to the stack, but the size is smaller than the + machine can push exactly, we need to use move instructions. */ + if (PUSH_ROUNDING (submodesize) != submodesize) + { + x = emit_move_resolve_push (mode, x); + return emit_move_insn (x, y); + } +#endif + + /* Note that the real part always precedes the imag part in memory + regardless of machine's endianness. */ + switch (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0))) + { + case PRE_DEC: + case POST_DEC: + imag_first = true; + break; + case PRE_INC: + case POST_INC: + imag_first = false; + break; + default: + gcc_unreachable (); + } + + emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (submode, XEXP (x, 0)), + read_complex_part (y, imag_first)); + return emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (submode, XEXP (x, 0)), + read_complex_part (y, !imag_first)); +} + +/* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X. + MODE is known to be complex. Returns the last instruction emitted. */ + +static rtx +emit_move_complex (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, rtx y) +{ + bool try_int; + + /* Need to take special care for pushes, to maintain proper ordering + of the data, and possibly extra padding. */ + if (push_operand (x, mode)) + return emit_move_complex_push (mode, x, y); + + /* See if we can coerce the target into moving both values at once. */ + + /* Move floating point as parts. */ + if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT + && mov_optab->handlers[GET_MODE_INNER (mode)].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing) + try_int = false; + /* Not possible if the values are inherently not adjacent. */ + else if (GET_CODE (x) == CONCAT || GET_CODE (y) == CONCAT) + try_int = false; + /* Is possible if both are registers (or subregs of registers). */ + else if (register_operand (x, mode) && register_operand (y, mode)) + try_int = true; + /* If one of the operands is a memory, and alignment constraints + are friendly enough, we may be able to do combined memory operations. + We do not attempt this if Y is a constant because that combination is + usually better with the by-parts thing below. */ + else if ((MEM_P (x) ? !CONSTANT_P (y) : MEM_P (y)) + && (!STRICT_ALIGNMENT + || get_mode_alignment (mode) == BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT)) + try_int = true; + else + try_int = false; + + if (try_int) + { + rtx ret; + + /* For memory to memory moves, optimal behavior can be had with the + existing block move logic. */ + if (MEM_P (x) && MEM_P (y)) + { + emit_block_move (x, y, GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)), + BLOCK_OP_NO_LIBCALL); + return get_last_insn (); + } + + ret = emit_move_via_integer (mode, x, y, true); + if (ret) + return ret; + } + + /* Show the output dies here. This is necessary for SUBREGs + of pseudos since we cannot track their lifetimes correctly; + hard regs shouldn't appear here except as return values. */ + if (!reload_completed && !reload_in_progress + && REG_P (x) && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, y)) + emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, x)); + + write_complex_part (x, read_complex_part (y, false), false); + write_complex_part (x, read_complex_part (y, true), true); + return get_last_insn (); +} + +/* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X. + MODE is known to be MODE_CC. Returns the last instruction emitted. */ + +static rtx +emit_move_ccmode (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, rtx y) +{ + rtx ret; + + /* Assume all MODE_CC modes are equivalent; if we have movcc, use it. */ + if (mode != CCmode) + { + enum insn_code code = mov_optab->handlers[CCmode].insn_code; + if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing) + { + x = emit_move_change_mode (CCmode, mode, x, true); + y = emit_move_change_mode (CCmode, mode, y, true); + return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code) (x, y)); + } + } + + /* Otherwise, find the MODE_INT mode of the same width. */ + ret = emit_move_via_integer (mode, x, y, false); + gcc_assert (ret != NULL); + return ret; +} + +/* Return true if word I of OP lies entirely in the + undefined bits of a paradoxical subreg. */ + +static bool +undefined_operand_subword_p (rtx op, int i) +{ + enum machine_mode innermode, innermostmode; + int offset; + if (GET_CODE (op) != SUBREG) + return false; + innermode = GET_MODE (op); + innermostmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op)); + offset = i * UNITS_PER_WORD + SUBREG_BYTE (op); + /* The SUBREG_BYTE represents offset, as if the value were stored in + memory, except for a paradoxical subreg where we define + SUBREG_BYTE to be 0; undo this exception as in + simplify_subreg. */ + if (SUBREG_BYTE (op) == 0 + && GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (innermode)) + { + int difference = (GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode) - GET_MODE_SIZE (innermode)); + if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN) + offset += (difference / UNITS_PER_WORD) * UNITS_PER_WORD; + if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN) + offset += difference % UNITS_PER_WORD; + } + if (offset >= GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode) + || offset <= -GET_MODE_SIZE (word_mode)) + return true; + return false; +} + +/* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X. + MODE is any multi-word or full-word mode that lacks a move_insn + pattern. Note that you will get better code if you define such + patterns, even if they must turn into multiple assembler instructions. */ + +static rtx +emit_move_multi_word (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, rtx y) +{ + rtx last_insn = 0; + rtx seq, inner; + bool need_clobber; + int i; + + gcc_assert (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) >= UNITS_PER_WORD); + + /* If X is a push on the stack, do the push now and replace + X with a reference to the stack pointer. */ + if (push_operand (x, mode)) + x = emit_move_resolve_push (mode, x); + + /* If we are in reload, see if either operand is a MEM whose address + is scheduled for replacement. */ + if (reload_in_progress && MEM_P (x) + && (inner = find_replacement (&XEXP (x, 0))) != XEXP (x, 0)) + x = replace_equiv_address_nv (x, inner); + if (reload_in_progress && MEM_P (y) + && (inner = find_replacement (&XEXP (y, 0))) != XEXP (y, 0)) + y = replace_equiv_address_nv (y, inner); + + start_sequence (); + + need_clobber = false; + for (i = 0; + i < (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD; + i++) + { + rtx xpart = operand_subword (x, i, 1, mode); + rtx ypart; + + /* Do not generate code for a move if it would come entirely + from the undefined bits of a paradoxical subreg. */ + if (undefined_operand_subword_p (y, i)) + continue; + + ypart = operand_subword (y, i, 1, mode); + + /* If we can't get a part of Y, put Y into memory if it is a + constant. Otherwise, force it into a register. Then we must + be able to get a part of Y. */ + if (ypart == 0 && CONSTANT_P (y)) + { + y = use_anchored_address (force_const_mem (mode, y)); + ypart = operand_subword (y, i, 1, mode); + } + else if (ypart == 0) + ypart = operand_subword_force (y, i, mode); + + gcc_assert (xpart && ypart); + + need_clobber |= (GET_CODE (xpart) == SUBREG); + + last_insn = emit_move_insn (xpart, ypart); + } + + seq = get_insns (); + end_sequence (); + + /* Show the output dies here. This is necessary for SUBREGs + of pseudos since we cannot track their lifetimes correctly; + hard regs shouldn't appear here except as return values. + We never want to emit such a clobber after reload. */ + if (x != y + && ! (reload_in_progress || reload_completed) + && need_clobber != 0) + emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, x)); + + emit_insn (seq); + + return last_insn; +} + +/* Low level part of emit_move_insn. + Called just like emit_move_insn, but assumes X and Y + are basically valid. */ + +rtx +emit_move_insn_1 (rtx x, rtx y) +{ + enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x); + enum insn_code code; + + gcc_assert ((unsigned int) mode < (unsigned int) MAX_MACHINE_MODE); + + code = mov_optab->handlers[mode].insn_code; + if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing) + return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code) (x, y)); + + /* Expand complex moves by moving real part and imag part. */ + if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode)) + return emit_move_complex (mode, x, y); + + if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_DECIMAL_FLOAT) + { + rtx result = emit_move_via_integer (mode, x, y, true); + + /* If we can't find an integer mode, use multi words. */ + if (result) + return result; + else + return emit_move_multi_word (mode, x, y); + } + + if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_CC) + return emit_move_ccmode (mode, x, y); + + /* Try using a move pattern for the corresponding integer mode. This is + only safe when simplify_subreg can convert MODE constants into integer + constants. At present, it can only do this reliably if the value + fits within a HOST_WIDE_INT. */ + if (!CONSTANT_P (y) || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) + { + rtx ret = emit_move_via_integer (mode, x, y, false); + if (ret) + return ret; + } + + return emit_move_multi_word (mode, x, y); +} + +/* Generate code to copy Y into X. + Both Y and X must have the same mode, except that + Y can be a constant with VOIDmode. + This mode cannot be BLKmode; use emit_block_move for that. + + Return the last instruction emitted. */ + +rtx +emit_move_insn (rtx x, rtx y) +{ + enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x); + rtx y_cst = NULL_RTX; + rtx last_insn, set; + + gcc_assert (mode != BLKmode + && (GET_MODE (y) == mode || GET_MODE (y) == VOIDmode)); + + if (CONSTANT_P (y)) + { + if (optimize + && SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)) + && (last_insn = compress_float_constant (x, y))) + return last_insn; + + y_cst = y; + + if (!LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (y)) + { + y = force_const_mem (mode, y); + + /* If the target's cannot_force_const_mem prevented the spill, + assume that the target's move expanders will also take care + of the non-legitimate constant. */ + if (!y) + y = y_cst; + else + y = use_anchored_address (y); + } + } + + /* If X or Y are memory references, verify that their addresses are valid + for the machine. */ + if (MEM_P (x) + && ((! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0)) + && ! push_operand (x, GET_MODE (x))) + || (flag_force_addr + && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (x, 0))))) + x = validize_mem (x); + + if (MEM_P (y) + && (! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (y), XEXP (y, 0)) + || (flag_force_addr + && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (y, 0))))) + y = validize_mem (y); + + gcc_assert (mode != BLKmode); + + last_insn = emit_move_insn_1 (x, y); + + if (y_cst && REG_P (x) + && (set = single_set (last_insn)) != NULL_RTX + && SET_DEST (set) == x + && ! rtx_equal_p (y_cst, SET_SRC (set))) + set_unique_reg_note (last_insn, REG_EQUAL, y_cst); + + return last_insn; +} + +/* If Y is representable exactly in a narrower mode, and the target can + perform the extension directly from constant or memory, then emit the + move as an extension. */ + +static rtx +compress_float_constant (rtx x, rtx y) +{ + enum machine_mode dstmode = GET_MODE (x); + enum machine_mode orig_srcmode = GET_MODE (y); + enum machine_mode srcmode; + REAL_VALUE_TYPE r; + int oldcost, newcost; + + REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, y); + + if (LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (y)) + oldcost = rtx_cost (y, SET); + else + oldcost = rtx_cost (force_const_mem (dstmode, y), SET); + + for (srcmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (GET_MODE_CLASS (orig_srcmode)); + srcmode != orig_srcmode; + srcmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (srcmode)) + { + enum insn_code ic; + rtx trunc_y, last_insn; + + /* Skip if the target can't extend this way. */ + ic = can_extend_p (dstmode, srcmode, 0); + if (ic == CODE_FOR_nothing) + continue; + + /* Skip if the narrowed value isn't exact. */ + if (! exact_real_truncate (srcmode, &r)) + continue; + + trunc_y = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (r, srcmode); + + if (LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (trunc_y)) + { + /* Skip if the target needs extra instructions to perform + the extension. */ + if (! (*insn_data[ic].operand[1].predicate) (trunc_y, srcmode)) + continue; + /* This is valid, but may not be cheaper than the original. */ + newcost = rtx_cost (gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (dstmode, trunc_y), SET); + if (oldcost < newcost) + continue; + } + else if (float_extend_from_mem[dstmode][srcmode]) + { + trunc_y = force_const_mem (srcmode, trunc_y); + /* This is valid, but may not be cheaper than the original. */ + newcost = rtx_cost (gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (dstmode, trunc_y), SET); + if (oldcost < newcost) + continue; + trunc_y = validize_mem (trunc_y); + } + else + continue; + + /* For CSE's benefit, force the compressed constant pool entry + into a new pseudo. This constant may be used in different modes, + and if not, combine will put things back together for us. */ + trunc_y = force_reg (srcmode, trunc_y); + emit_unop_insn (ic, x, trunc_y, UNKNOWN); + last_insn = get_last_insn (); + + if (REG_P (x)) + set_unique_reg_note (last_insn, REG_EQUAL, y); + + return last_insn; + } + + return NULL_RTX; +} + +/* Pushing data onto the stack. */ + +/* Push a block of length SIZE (perhaps variable) + and return an rtx to address the beginning of the block. + The value may be virtual_outgoing_args_rtx. + + EXTRA is the number of bytes of padding to push in addition to SIZE. + BELOW nonzero means this padding comes at low addresses; + otherwise, the padding comes at high addresses. */ + +rtx +push_block (rtx size, int extra, int below) +{ + rtx temp; + + size = convert_modes (Pmode, ptr_mode, size, 1); + if (CONSTANT_P (size)) + anti_adjust_stack (plus_constant (size, extra)); + else if (REG_P (size) && extra == 0) + anti_adjust_stack (size); + else + { + temp = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, size); + if (extra != 0) + temp = expand_binop (Pmode, add_optab, temp, GEN_INT (extra), + temp, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN); + anti_adjust_stack (temp); + } + +#ifndef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD + if (0) +#else + if (1) +#endif + { + temp = virtual_outgoing_args_rtx; + if (extra != 0 && below) + temp = plus_constant (temp, extra); + } + else + { + if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT) + temp = plus_constant (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx, + -INTVAL (size) - (below ? 0 : extra)); + else if (extra != 0 && !below) + temp = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx, + negate_rtx (Pmode, plus_constant (size, extra))); + else + temp = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx, + negate_rtx (Pmode, size)); + } + + return memory_address (GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), temp); +} + +#ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING + +/* Emit single push insn. */ + +static void +emit_single_push_insn (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, tree type) +{ + rtx dest_addr; + unsigned rounded_size = PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)); + rtx dest; + enum insn_code icode; + insn_operand_predicate_fn pred; + + stack_pointer_delta += PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)); + /* If there is push pattern, use it. Otherwise try old way of throwing + MEM representing push operation to move expander. */ + icode = push_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code; + if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing) + { + if (((pred = insn_data[(int) icode].operand[0].predicate) + && !((*pred) (x, mode)))) + x = force_reg (mode, x); + emit_insn (GEN_FCN (icode) (x)); + return; + } + if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == rounded_size) + dest_addr = gen_rtx_fmt_e (STACK_PUSH_CODE, Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx); + /* If we are to pad downward, adjust the stack pointer first and + then store X into the stack location using an offset. This is + because emit_move_insn does not know how to pad; it does not have + access to type. */ + else if (FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode, type) == downward) + { + unsigned padding_size = rounded_size - GET_MODE_SIZE (mode); + HOST_WIDE_INT offset; + + emit_move_insn (stack_pointer_rtx, + expand_binop (Pmode, +#ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD + sub_optab, +#else + add_optab, +#endif + stack_pointer_rtx, + GEN_INT (rounded_size), + NULL_RTX, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN)); + + offset = (HOST_WIDE_INT) padding_size; +#ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD + if (STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_DEC) + /* We have already decremented the stack pointer, so get the + previous value. */ + offset += (HOST_WIDE_INT) rounded_size; +#else + if (STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_INC) + /* We have already incremented the stack pointer, so get the + previous value. */ + offset -= (HOST_WIDE_INT) rounded_size; +#endif + dest_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx, GEN_INT (offset)); + } + else + { +#ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD + /* ??? This seems wrong if STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_DEC. */ + dest_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx, + GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT) rounded_size)); +#else + /* ??? This seems wrong if STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_INC. */ + dest_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx, + GEN_INT (rounded_size)); +#endif + dest_addr = gen_rtx_PRE_MODIFY (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx, dest_addr); + } + + dest = gen_rtx_MEM (mode, dest_addr); + + if (type != 0) + { + set_mem_attributes (dest, type, 1); + + if (flag_optimize_sibling_calls) + /* Function incoming arguments may overlap with sibling call + outgoing arguments and we cannot allow reordering of reads + from function arguments with stores to outgoing arguments + of sibling calls. */ + set_mem_alias_set (dest, 0); + } + emit_move_insn (dest, x); +} +#endif + +/* Generate code to push X onto the stack, assuming it has mode MODE and + type TYPE. + MODE is redundant except when X is a CONST_INT (since they don't + carry mode info). + SIZE is an rtx for the size of data to be copied (in bytes), + needed only if X is BLKmode. + + ALIGN (in bits) is maximum alignment we can assume. + + If PARTIAL and REG are both nonzero, then copy that many of the first + bytes of X into registers starting with REG, and push the rest of X. + The amount of space pushed is decreased by PARTIAL bytes. + REG must be a hard register in this case. + If REG is zero but PARTIAL is not, take any all others actions for an + argument partially in registers, but do not actually load any + registers. + + EXTRA is the amount in bytes of extra space to leave next to this arg. + This is ignored if an argument block has already been allocated. + + On a machine that lacks real push insns, ARGS_ADDR is the address of + the bottom of the argument block for this call. We use indexing off there + to store the arg. On machines with push insns, ARGS_ADDR is 0 when a + argument block has not been preallocated. + + ARGS_SO_FAR is the size of args previously pushed for this call. + + REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE is nonzero if functions require stack space + for arguments passed in registers. If nonzero, it will be the number + of bytes required. */ + +void +emit_push_insn (rtx x, enum machine_mode mode, tree type, rtx size, + unsigned int align, int partial, rtx reg, int extra, + rtx args_addr, rtx args_so_far, int reg_parm_stack_space, + rtx alignment_pad) +{ + rtx xinner; + enum direction stack_direction +#ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD + = downward; +#else + = upward; +#endif + + /* Decide where to pad the argument: `downward' for below, + `upward' for above, or `none' for don't pad it. + Default is below for small data on big-endian machines; else above. */ + enum direction where_pad = FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode, type); + + /* Invert direction if stack is post-decrement. + FIXME: why? */ + if (STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_DEC) + if (where_pad != none) + where_pad = (where_pad == downward ? upward : downward); + + xinner = x; + + if (mode == BLKmode) + { + /* Copy a block into the stack, entirely or partially. */ + + rtx temp; + int used; + int offset; + int skip; + + offset = partial % (PARM_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT); + used = partial - offset; + + gcc_assert (size); + + /* USED is now the # of bytes we need not copy to the stack + because registers will take care of them. */ + + if (partial != 0) + xinner = adjust_address (xinner, BLKmode, used); + + /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size, + skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers. + Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space, + by setting SKIP to 0. */ + skip = (reg_parm_stack_space == 0) ? 0 : used; + +#ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING + /* Do it with several push insns if that doesn't take lots of insns + and if there is no difficulty with push insns that skip bytes + on the stack for alignment purposes. */ + if (args_addr == 0 + && PUSH_ARGS + && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT + && skip == 0 + && MEM_ALIGN (xinner) >= align + && (MOVE_BY_PIECES_P ((unsigned) INTVAL (size) - used, align)) + /* Here we avoid the case of a structure whose weak alignment + forces many pushes of a small amount of data, + and such small pushes do rounding that causes trouble. */ + && ((! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (word_mode, align)) + || align >= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT + || (PUSH_ROUNDING (align / BITS_PER_UNIT) + == (align / BITS_PER_UNIT))) + && PUSH_ROUNDING (INTVAL (size)) == INTVAL (size)) + { + /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down, + or if padding below and stack grows up. + But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */ + if (extra && args_addr == 0 + && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction) + anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra)); + + move_by_pieces (NULL, xinner, INTVAL (size) - used, align, 0); + } + else +#endif /* PUSH_ROUNDING */ + { + rtx target; + + /* Otherwise make space on the stack and copy the data + to the address of that space. */ + + /* Deduct words put into registers from the size we must copy. */ + if (partial != 0) + { + if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT) + size = GEN_INT (INTVAL (size) - used); + else + size = expand_binop (GET_MODE (size), sub_optab, size, + GEN_INT (used), NULL_RTX, 0, + OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN); + } + + /* Get the address of the stack space. + In this case, we do not deal with EXTRA separately. + A single stack adjust will do. */ + if (! args_addr) + { + temp = push_block (size, extra, where_pad == downward); + extra = 0; + } + else if (GET_CODE (args_so_far) == CONST_INT) + temp = memory_address (BLKmode, + plus_constant (args_addr, + skip + INTVAL (args_so_far))); + else + temp = memory_address (BLKmode, + plus_constant (gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, + args_addr, + args_so_far), + skip)); + + if (!ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS) + { + /* If the source is referenced relative to the stack pointer, + copy it to another register to stabilize it. We do not need + to do this if we know that we won't be changing sp. */ + + if (reg_mentioned_p (virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx, temp) + || reg_mentioned_p (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx, temp)) + temp = copy_to_reg (temp); + } + + target = gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode, temp); + + /* We do *not* set_mem_attributes here, because incoming arguments + may overlap with sibling call outgoing arguments and we cannot + allow reordering of reads from function arguments with stores + to outgoing arguments of sibling calls. We do, however, want + to record the alignment of the stack slot. */ + /* ALIGN may well be better aligned than TYPE, e.g. due to + PARM_BOUNDARY. Assume the caller isn't lying. */ + set_mem_align (target, align); + + emit_block_move (target, xinner, size, BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM); + } + } + else if (partial > 0) + { + /* Scalar partly in registers. */ + + int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD; + int i; + int not_stack; + /* # bytes of start of argument + that we must make space for but need not store. */ + int offset = partial % (PARM_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT); + int args_offset = INTVAL (args_so_far); + int skip; + + /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down, + or if padding below and stack grows up. + But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */ + if (extra && args_addr == 0 + && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction) + anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra)); + + /* If we make space by pushing it, we might as well push + the real data. Otherwise, we can leave OFFSET nonzero + and leave the space uninitialized. */ + if (args_addr == 0) + offset = 0; + + /* Now NOT_STACK gets the number of words that we don't need to + allocate on the stack. Convert OFFSET to words too. */ + not_stack = (partial - offset) / UNITS_PER_WORD; + offset /= UNITS_PER_WORD; + + /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size, + skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers. + Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space, + by setting SKIP to 0. */ + skip = (reg_parm_stack_space == 0) ? 0 : not_stack; + + if (CONSTANT_P (x) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (x)) + x = validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode, x)); + + /* If X is a hard register in a non-integer mode, copy it into a pseudo; + SUBREGs of such registers are not allowed. */ + if ((REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER + && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) != MODE_INT)) + x = copy_to_reg (x); + + /* Loop over all the words allocated on the stack for this arg. */ + /* We can do it by words, because any scalar bigger than a word + has a size a multiple of a word. */ +#ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED + for (i = not_stack; i < size; i++) +#else + for (i = size - 1; i >= not_stack; i--) +#endif + if (i >= not_stack + offset) + emit_push_insn (operand_subword_force (x, i, mode), + word_mode, NULL_TREE, NULL_RTX, align, 0, NULL_RTX, + 0, args_addr, + GEN_INT (args_offset + ((i - not_stack + skip) + * UNITS_PER_WORD)), + reg_parm_stack_space, alignment_pad); + } + else + { + rtx addr; + rtx dest; + + /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down, + or if padding below and stack grows up. + But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */ + if (extra && args_addr == 0 + && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction) + anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra)); + +#ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING + if (args_addr == 0 && PUSH_ARGS) + emit_single_push_insn (mode, x, type); + else +#endif + { + if (GET_CODE (args_so_far) == CONST_INT) + addr + = memory_address (mode, + plus_constant (args_addr, + INTVAL (args_so_far))); + else + addr = memory_address (mode, gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, args_addr, + args_so_far)); + dest = gen_rtx_MEM (mode, addr); + + /* We do *not* set_mem_attributes here, because incoming arguments + may overlap with sibling call outgoing arguments and we cannot + allow reordering of reads from function arguments with stores + to outgoing arguments of sibling calls. We do, however, want + to record the alignment of the stack slot. */ + /* ALIGN may well be better aligned than TYPE, e.g. due to + PARM_BOUNDARY. Assume the caller isn't lying. */ + set_mem_align (dest, align); + + emit_move_insn (dest, x); + } + } + + /* If part should go in registers, copy that part + into the appropriate registers. Do this now, at the end, + since mem-to-mem copies above may do function calls. */ + if (partial > 0 && reg != 0) + { + /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple non-contiguous locations. + The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */ + if (GET_CODE (reg) == PARALLEL) + emit_group_load (reg, x, type, -1); + else + { + gcc_assert (partial % UNITS_PER_WORD == 0); + move_block_to_reg (REGNO (reg), x, partial / UNITS_PER_WORD, mode); + } + } + + if (extra && args_addr == 0 && where_pad == stack_direction) + anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra)); + + if (alignment_pad && args_addr == 0) + anti_adjust_stack (alignment_pad); +} + +/* Return X if X can be used as a subtarget in a sequence of arithmetic + operations. */ + +static rtx +get_subtarget (rtx x) +{ + return (optimize + || x == 0 + /* Only registers can be subtargets. */ + || !REG_P (x) + /* Don't use hard regs to avoid extending their life. */ + || REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER + ? 0 : x); +} + +/* A subroutine of expand_assignment. Optimize FIELD op= VAL, where + FIELD is a bitfield. Returns true if the optimization was successful, + and there's nothing else to do. */ + +static bool +optimize_bitfield_assignment_op (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize, + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos, + enum machine_mode mode1, rtx str_rtx, + tree to, tree src) +{ + enum machine_mode str_mode = GET_MODE (str_rtx); + unsigned int str_bitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (str_mode); + tree op0, op1; + rtx value, result; + optab binop; + + if (mode1 != VOIDmode + || bitsize >= BITS_PER_WORD + || str_bitsize > BITS_PER_WORD + || TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (to) + || TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (to)) + return false; + + STRIP_NOPS (src); + if (!BINARY_CLASS_P (src) + || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (src)) != INTEGER_TYPE) + return false; + + op0 = TREE_OPERAND (src, 0); + op1 = TREE_OPERAND (src, 1); + STRIP_NOPS (op0); + + if (!operand_equal_p (to, op0, 0)) + return false; + + if (MEM_P (str_rtx)) + { + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT offset1; + + if (str_bitsize == 0 || str_bitsize > BITS_PER_WORD) + str_mode = word_mode; + str_mode = get_best_mode (bitsize, bitpos, + MEM_ALIGN (str_rtx), str_mode, 0); + if (str_mode == VOIDmode) + return false; + str_bitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (str_mode); + + offset1 = bitpos; + bitpos %= str_bitsize; + offset1 = (offset1 - bitpos) / BITS_PER_UNIT; + str_rtx = adjust_address (str_rtx, str_mode, offset1); + } + else if (!REG_P (str_rtx) && GET_CODE (str_rtx) != SUBREG) + return false; + + /* If the bit field covers the whole REG/MEM, store_field + will likely generate better code. */ + if (bitsize >= str_bitsize) + return false; + + /* We can't handle fields split across multiple entities. */ + if (bitpos + bitsize > str_bitsize) + return false; + + if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN) + bitpos = str_bitsize - bitpos - bitsize; + + switch (TREE_CODE (src)) + { + case PLUS_EXPR: + case MINUS_EXPR: + /* For now, just optimize the case of the topmost bitfield + where we don't need to do any masking and also + 1 bit bitfields where xor can be used. + We might win by one instruction for the other bitfields + too if insv/extv instructions aren't used, so that + can be added later. */ + if (bitpos + bitsize != str_bitsize + && (bitsize != 1 || TREE_CODE (op1) != INTEGER_CST)) + break; + + value = expand_expr (op1, NULL_RTX, str_mode, 0); + value = convert_modes (str_mode, + TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op1)), value, + TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (op1))); + + /* We may be accessing data outside the field, which means + we can alias adjacent data. */ + if (MEM_P (str_rtx)) + { + str_rtx = shallow_copy_rtx (str_rtx); + set_mem_alias_set (str_rtx, 0); + set_mem_expr (str_rtx, 0); + } + + binop = TREE_CODE (src) == PLUS_EXPR ? add_optab : sub_optab; + if (bitsize == 1 && bitpos + bitsize != str_bitsize) + { + value = expand_and (str_mode, value, const1_rtx, NULL); + binop = xor_optab; + } + value = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, str_mode, value, + build_int_cst (NULL_TREE, bitpos), + NULL_RTX, 1); + result = expand_binop (str_mode, binop, str_rtx, + value, str_rtx, 1, OPTAB_WIDEN); + if (result != str_rtx) + emit_move_insn (str_rtx, result); + return true; + + case BIT_IOR_EXPR: + case BIT_XOR_EXPR: + if (TREE_CODE (op1) != INTEGER_CST) + break; + value = expand_expr (op1, NULL_RTX, GET_MODE (str_rtx), 0); + value = convert_modes (GET_MODE (str_rtx), + TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op1)), value, + TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (op1))); + + /* We may be accessing data outside the field, which means + we can alias adjacent data. */ + if (MEM_P (str_rtx)) + { + str_rtx = shallow_copy_rtx (str_rtx); + set_mem_alias_set (str_rtx, 0); + set_mem_expr (str_rtx, 0); + } + + binop = TREE_CODE (src) == BIT_IOR_EXPR ? ior_optab : xor_optab; + if (bitpos + bitsize != GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (str_rtx))) + { + rtx mask = GEN_INT (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << bitsize) + - 1); + value = expand_and (GET_MODE (str_rtx), value, mask, + NULL_RTX); + } + value = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (str_rtx), value, + build_int_cst (NULL_TREE, bitpos), + NULL_RTX, 1); + result = expand_binop (GET_MODE (str_rtx), binop, str_rtx, + value, str_rtx, 1, OPTAB_WIDEN); + if (result != str_rtx) + emit_move_insn (str_rtx, result); + return true; + + default: + break; + } + + return false; +} + + +/* Expand an assignment that stores the value of FROM into TO. */ + +void +expand_assignment (tree to, tree from) +{ + rtx to_rtx = 0; + rtx result; + + /* Don't crash if the lhs of the assignment was erroneous. */ + if (TREE_CODE (to) == ERROR_MARK) + { + result = expand_normal (from); + return; + } + + /* Optimize away no-op moves without side-effects. */ + if (operand_equal_p (to, from, 0)) + return; + + /* Assignment of a structure component needs special treatment + if the structure component's rtx is not simply a MEM. + Assignment of an array element at a constant index, and assignment of + an array element in an unaligned packed structure field, has the same + problem. */ + if (handled_component_p (to) + || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (to)) == ARRAY_TYPE) + { + enum machine_mode mode1; + HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize, bitpos; + tree offset; + int unsignedp; + int volatilep = 0; + tree tem; + + push_temp_slots (); + tem = get_inner_reference (to, &bitsize, &bitpos, &offset, &mode1, + &unsignedp, &volatilep, true); + + /* If we are going to use store_bit_field and extract_bit_field, + make sure to_rtx will be safe for multiple use. */ + + to_rtx = expand_normal (tem); + + if (offset != 0) + { + rtx offset_rtx; + + if (!MEM_P (to_rtx)) + { + /* We can get constant negative offsets into arrays with broken + user code. Translate this to a trap instead of ICEing. */ + gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (offset) == INTEGER_CST); + expand_builtin_trap (); + to_rtx = gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode, const0_rtx); + } + + offset_rtx = expand_expr (offset, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM); +#ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED + if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != Pmode) + offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (Pmode, offset_rtx, 0); +#else + if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != ptr_mode) + offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (ptr_mode, offset_rtx, 0); +#endif + + /* A constant address in TO_RTX can have VOIDmode, we must not try + to call force_reg for that case. Avoid that case. */ + if (MEM_P (to_rtx) + && GET_MODE (to_rtx) == BLKmode + && GET_MODE (XEXP (to_rtx, 0)) != VOIDmode + && bitsize > 0 + && (bitpos % bitsize) == 0 + && (bitsize % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1)) == 0 + && MEM_ALIGN (to_rtx) == GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1)) + { + to_rtx = adjust_address (to_rtx, mode1, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT); + bitpos = 0; + } + + to_rtx = offset_address (to_rtx, offset_rtx, + highest_pow2_factor_for_target (to, + offset)); + } + + /* Handle expand_expr of a complex value returning a CONCAT. */ + if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == CONCAT) + { + if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (from)) == COMPLEX_TYPE) + { + gcc_assert (bitpos == 0); + result = store_expr (from, to_rtx, false); + } + else + { + gcc_assert (bitpos == 0 || bitpos == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode1)); + result = store_expr (from, XEXP (to_rtx, bitpos != 0), false); + } + } + else + { + if (MEM_P (to_rtx)) + { + /* If the field is at offset zero, we could have been given the + DECL_RTX of the parent struct. Don't munge it. */ + to_rtx = shallow_copy_rtx (to_rtx); + + set_mem_attributes_minus_bitpos (to_rtx, to, 0, bitpos); + + /* Deal with volatile and readonly fields. The former is only + done for MEM. Also set MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P if needed. */ + if (volatilep) + MEM_VOLATILE_P (to_rtx) = 1; + if (component_uses_parent_alias_set (to)) + MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx) = 1; + } + + if (optimize_bitfield_assignment_op (bitsize, bitpos, mode1, + to_rtx, to, from)) + result = NULL; + else + result = store_field (to_rtx, bitsize, bitpos, mode1, from, + TREE_TYPE (tem), get_alias_set (to)); + } + + if (result) + preserve_temp_slots (result); + free_temp_slots (); + pop_temp_slots (); + return; + } + + /* If the rhs is a function call and its value is not an aggregate, + call the function before we start to compute the lhs. + This is needed for correct code for cases such as + val = setjmp (buf) on machines where reference to val + requires loading up part of an address in a separate insn. + + Don't do this if TO is a VAR_DECL or PARM_DECL whose DECL_RTL is REG + since it might be a promoted variable where the zero- or sign- extension + needs to be done. Handling this in the normal way is safe because no + computation is done before the call. */ + if (TREE_CODE (from) == CALL_EXPR && ! aggregate_value_p (from, from) + && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (from))) == INTEGER_CST + && ! ((TREE_CODE (to) == VAR_DECL || TREE_CODE (to) == PARM_DECL) + && REG_P (DECL_RTL (to)))) + { + rtx value; + + push_temp_slots (); + value = expand_normal (from); + if (to_rtx == 0) + to_rtx = expand_expr (to, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, EXPAND_WRITE); + + /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations. + The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */ + if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == PARALLEL) + emit_group_load (to_rtx, value, TREE_TYPE (from), + int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from))); + else if (GET_MODE (to_rtx) == BLKmode) + emit_block_move (to_rtx, value, expr_size (from), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL); + else + { + if (POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (to))) + value = convert_memory_address (GET_MODE (to_rtx), value); + emit_move_insn (to_rtx, value); + } + preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx); + free_temp_slots (); + pop_temp_slots (); + return; + } + + /* Ordinary treatment. Expand TO to get a REG or MEM rtx. + Don't re-expand if it was expanded already (in COMPONENT_REF case). */ + + if (to_rtx == 0) + to_rtx = expand_expr (to, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, EXPAND_WRITE); + + /* Don't move directly into a return register. */ + if (TREE_CODE (to) == RESULT_DECL + && (REG_P (to_rtx) || GET_CODE (to_rtx) == PARALLEL)) + { + rtx temp; + + push_temp_slots (); + temp = expand_expr (from, 0, GET_MODE (to_rtx), 0); + + if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == PARALLEL) + emit_group_load (to_rtx, temp, TREE_TYPE (from), + int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from))); + else + emit_move_insn (to_rtx, temp); + + preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx); + free_temp_slots (); + pop_temp_slots (); + return; + } + + /* In case we are returning the contents of an object which overlaps + the place the value is being stored, use a safe function when copying + a value through a pointer into a structure value return block. */ + if (TREE_CODE (to) == RESULT_DECL && TREE_CODE (from) == INDIRECT_REF + && current_function_returns_struct + && !current_function_returns_pcc_struct) + { + rtx from_rtx, size; + + push_temp_slots (); + size = expr_size (from); + from_rtx = expand_normal (from); + + emit_library_call (memmove_libfunc, LCT_NORMAL, + VOIDmode, 3, XEXP (to_rtx, 0), Pmode, + XEXP (from_rtx, 0), Pmode, + convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (sizetype), + size, TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype)), + TYPE_MODE (sizetype)); + + preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx); + free_temp_slots (); + pop_temp_slots (); + return; + } + + /* Compute FROM and store the value in the rtx we got. */ + + push_temp_slots (); + result = store_expr (from, to_rtx, 0); + preserve_temp_slots (result); + free_temp_slots (); + pop_temp_slots (); + return; +} + +/* Generate code for computing expression EXP, + and storing the value into TARGET. + + If the mode is BLKmode then we may return TARGET itself. + It turns out that in BLKmode it doesn't cause a problem. + because C has no operators that could combine two different + assignments into the same BLKmode object with different values + with no sequence point. Will other languages need this to + be more thorough? + + If CALL_PARAM_P is nonzero, this is a store into a call param on the + stack, and block moves may need to be treated specially. */ + +rtx +store_expr (tree exp, rtx target, int call_param_p) +{ + rtx temp; + rtx alt_rtl = NULL_RTX; + int dont_return_target = 0; + + if (VOID_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp))) + { + /* C++ can generate ?: expressions with a throw expression in one + branch and an rvalue in the other. Here, we resolve attempts to + store the throw expression's nonexistent result. */ + gcc_assert (!call_param_p); + expand_expr (exp, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0); + return NULL_RTX; + } + if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPOUND_EXPR) + { + /* Perform first part of compound expression, then assign from second + part. */ + expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, + call_param_p ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL); + return store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, call_param_p); + } + else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COND_EXPR && GET_MODE (target) == BLKmode) + { + /* For conditional expression, get safe form of the target. Then + test the condition, doing the appropriate assignment on either + side. This avoids the creation of unnecessary temporaries. + For non-BLKmode, it is more efficient not to do this. */ + + rtx lab1 = gen_label_rtx (), lab2 = gen_label_rtx (); + + do_pending_stack_adjust (); + NO_DEFER_POP; + jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), lab1); + store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, call_param_p); + emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (lab2)); + emit_barrier (); + emit_label (lab1); + store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), target, call_param_p); + emit_label (lab2); + OK_DEFER_POP; + + return NULL_RTX; + } + else if (GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (target)) + /* If this is a scalar in a register that is stored in a wider mode + than the declared mode, compute the result into its declared mode + and then convert to the wider mode. Our value is the computed + expression. */ + { + rtx inner_target = 0; + + /* We can do the conversion inside EXP, which will often result + in some optimizations. Do the conversion in two steps: first + change the signedness, if needed, then the extend. But don't + do this if the type of EXP is a subtype of something else + since then the conversion might involve more than just + converting modes. */ + if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp)) + && TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == 0 + && (!lang_hooks.reduce_bit_field_operations + || (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (target)) + == TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp))))) + { + if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp)) + != SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target)) + exp = fold_convert + (lang_hooks.types.signed_or_unsigned_type + (SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target), TREE_TYPE (exp)), exp); + + exp = fold_convert (lang_hooks.types.type_for_mode + (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target)), + SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target)), + exp); + + inner_target = SUBREG_REG (target); + } + + temp = expand_expr (exp, inner_target, VOIDmode, + call_param_p ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL); + + /* If TEMP is a VOIDmode constant, use convert_modes to make + sure that we properly convert it. */ + if (CONSTANT_P (temp) && GET_MODE (temp) == VOIDmode) + { + temp = convert_modes (GET_MODE (target), TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)), + temp, SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target)); + temp = convert_modes (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target)), + GET_MODE (target), temp, + SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target)); + } + + convert_move (SUBREG_REG (target), temp, + SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target)); + + return NULL_RTX; + } + else + { + temp = expand_expr_real (exp, target, GET_MODE (target), + (call_param_p + ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL), + &alt_rtl); + /* Return TARGET if it's a specified hardware register. + If TARGET is a volatile mem ref, either return TARGET + or return a reg copied *from* TARGET; ANSI requires this. + + Otherwise, if TEMP is not TARGET, return TEMP + if it is constant (for efficiency), + or if we really want the correct value. */ + if (!(target && REG_P (target) + && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) + && !(MEM_P (target) && MEM_VOLATILE_P (target)) + && ! rtx_equal_p (temp, target) + && CONSTANT_P (temp)) + dont_return_target = 1; + } + + /* If TEMP is a VOIDmode constant and the mode of the type of EXP is not + the same as that of TARGET, adjust the constant. This is needed, for + example, in case it is a CONST_DOUBLE and we want only a word-sized + value. */ + if (CONSTANT_P (temp) && GET_MODE (temp) == VOIDmode + && TREE_CODE (exp) != ERROR_MARK + && GET_MODE (target) != TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp))) + temp = convert_modes (GET_MODE (target), TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)), + temp, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp))); + + /* If value was not generated in the target, store it there. + Convert the value to TARGET's type first if necessary and emit the + pending incrementations that have been queued when expanding EXP. + Note that we cannot emit the whole queue blindly because this will + effectively disable the POST_INC optimization later. + + If TEMP and TARGET compare equal according to rtx_equal_p, but + one or both of them are volatile memory refs, we have to distinguish + two cases: + - expand_expr has used TARGET. In this case, we must not generate + another copy. This can be detected by TARGET being equal according + to == . + - expand_expr has not used TARGET - that means that the source just + happens to have the same RTX form. Since temp will have been created + by expand_expr, it will compare unequal according to == . + We must generate a copy in this case, to reach the correct number + of volatile memory references. */ + + if ((! rtx_equal_p (temp, target) + || (temp != target && (side_effects_p (temp) + || side_effects_p (target)))) + && TREE_CODE (exp) != ERROR_MARK + /* If store_expr stores a DECL whose DECL_RTL(exp) == TARGET, + but TARGET is not valid memory reference, TEMP will differ + from TARGET although it is really the same location. */ + && !(alt_rtl && rtx_equal_p (alt_rtl, target)) + /* If there's nothing to copy, don't bother. Don't call + expr_size unless necessary, because some front-ends (C++) + expr_size-hook must not be given objects that are not + supposed to be bit-copied or bit-initialized. */ + && expr_size (exp) != const0_rtx) + { + if (GET_MODE (temp) != GET_MODE (target) + && GET_MODE (temp) != VOIDmode) + { + int unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp)); + if (dont_return_target) + { + /* In this case, we will return TEMP, + so make sure it has the proper mode. + But don't forget to store the value into TARGET. */ + temp = convert_to_mode (GET_MODE (target), temp, unsignedp); + emit_move_insn (target, temp); + } + else + convert_move (target, temp, unsignedp); + } + + else if (GET_MODE (temp) == BLKmode && TREE_CODE (exp) == STRING_CST) + { + /* Handle copying a string constant into an array. The string + constant may be shorter than the array. So copy just the string's + actual length, and clear the rest. First get the size of the data + type of the string, which is actually the size of the target. */ + rtx size = expr_size (exp); + + if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT + && INTVAL (size) < TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp)) + emit_block_move (target, temp, size, + (call_param_p + ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL)); + else + { + /* Compute the size of the data to copy from the string. */ + tree copy_size + = size_binop (MIN_EXPR, + make_tree (sizetype, size), + size_int (TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp))); + rtx copy_size_rtx + = expand_expr (copy_size, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, + (call_param_p + ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL)); + rtx label = 0; + + /* Copy that much. */ + copy_size_rtx = convert_to_mode (ptr_mode, copy_size_rtx, + TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype)); + emit_block_move (target, temp, copy_size_rtx, + (call_param_p + ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL)); + + /* Figure out how much is left in TARGET that we have to clear. + Do all calculations in ptr_mode. */ + if (GET_CODE (copy_size_rtx) == CONST_INT) + { + size = plus_constant (size, -INTVAL (copy_size_rtx)); + target = adjust_address (target, BLKmode, + INTVAL (copy_size_rtx)); + } + else + { + size = expand_binop (TYPE_MODE (sizetype), sub_optab, size, + copy_size_rtx, NULL_RTX, 0, + OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN); + +#ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED + if (GET_MODE (copy_size_rtx) != Pmode) + copy_size_rtx = convert_to_mode (Pmode, copy_size_rtx, + TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype)); +#endif + + target = offset_address (target, copy_size_rtx, + highest_pow2_factor (copy_size)); + label = gen_label_rtx (); + emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (size, const0_rtx, LT, NULL_RTX, + GET_MODE (size), 0, label); + } + + if (size != const0_rtx) + clear_storage (target, size, BLOCK_OP_NORMAL); + + if (label) + emit_label (label); + } + } + /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations. + The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */ + else if (GET_CODE (target) == PARALLEL) + emit_group_load (target, temp, TREE_TYPE (exp), + int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp))); + else if (GET_MODE (temp) == BLKmode) + emit_block_move (target, temp, expr_size (exp), + (call_param_p + ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL)); + else + { + temp = force_operand (temp, target); + if (temp != target) + emit_move_insn (target, temp); + } + } + + return NULL_RTX; +} + +/* Helper for categorize_ctor_elements. Identical interface. */ + +static bool +categorize_ctor_elements_1 (tree ctor, HOST_WIDE_INT *p_nz_elts, + HOST_WIDE_INT *p_elt_count, + bool *p_must_clear) +{ + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx; + HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts, elt_count; + tree value, purpose; + + /* Whether CTOR is a valid constant initializer, in accordance with what + initializer_constant_valid_p does. If inferred from the constructor + elements, true until proven otherwise. */ + bool const_from_elts_p = constructor_static_from_elts_p (ctor); + bool const_p = const_from_elts_p ? true : TREE_STATIC (ctor); + + nz_elts = 0; + elt_count = 0; + + FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (ctor), idx, purpose, value) + { + HOST_WIDE_INT mult; + + mult = 1; + if (TREE_CODE (purpose) == RANGE_EXPR) + { + tree lo_index = TREE_OPERAND (purpose, 0); + tree hi_index = TREE_OPERAND (purpose, 1); + + if (host_integerp (lo_index, 1) && host_integerp (hi_index, 1)) + mult = (tree_low_cst (hi_index, 1) + - tree_low_cst (lo_index, 1) + 1); + } + + switch (TREE_CODE (value)) + { + case CONSTRUCTOR: + { + HOST_WIDE_INT nz = 0, ic = 0; + + bool const_elt_p + = categorize_ctor_elements_1 (value, &nz, &ic, p_must_clear); + + nz_elts += mult * nz; + elt_count += mult * ic; + + if (const_from_elts_p && const_p) + const_p = const_elt_p; + } + break; + + case INTEGER_CST: + case REAL_CST: + if (!initializer_zerop (value)) + nz_elts += mult; + elt_count += mult; + break; + + case STRING_CST: + nz_elts += mult * TREE_STRING_LENGTH (value); + elt_count += mult * TREE_STRING_LENGTH (value); + break; + + case COMPLEX_CST: + if (!initializer_zerop (TREE_REALPART (value))) + nz_elts += mult; + if (!initializer_zerop (TREE_IMAGPART (value))) + nz_elts += mult; + elt_count += mult; + break; + + case VECTOR_CST: + { + tree v; + for (v = TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (value); v; v = TREE_CHAIN (v)) + { + if (!initializer_zerop (TREE_VALUE (v))) + nz_elts += mult; + elt_count += mult; + } + } + break; + + default: + nz_elts += mult; + elt_count += mult; + + if (const_from_elts_p && const_p) + const_p = initializer_constant_valid_p (value, TREE_TYPE (value)) + != NULL_TREE; + break; + } + } + + if (!*p_must_clear + && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (ctor)) == UNION_TYPE + || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (ctor)) == QUAL_UNION_TYPE)) + { + tree init_sub_type; + bool clear_this = true; + + if (!VEC_empty (constructor_elt, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (ctor))) + { + /* We don't expect more than one element of the union to be + initialized. Not sure what we should do otherwise... */ + gcc_assert (VEC_length (constructor_elt, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (ctor)) + == 1); + + init_sub_type = TREE_TYPE (VEC_index (constructor_elt, + CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (ctor), + 0)->value); + + /* ??? We could look at each element of the union, and find the + largest element. Which would avoid comparing the size of the + initialized element against any tail padding in the union. + Doesn't seem worth the effort... */ + if (simple_cst_equal (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (ctor)), + TYPE_SIZE (init_sub_type)) == 1) + { + /* And now we have to find out if the element itself is fully + constructed. E.g. for union { struct { int a, b; } s; } u + = { .s = { .a = 1 } }. */ + if (elt_count == count_type_elements (init_sub_type, false)) + clear_this = false; + } + } + + *p_must_clear = clear_this; + } + + *p_nz_elts += nz_elts; + *p_elt_count += elt_count; + + return const_p; +} + +/* Examine CTOR to discover: + * how many scalar fields are set to nonzero values, + and place it in *P_NZ_ELTS; + * how many scalar fields in total are in CTOR, + and place it in *P_ELT_COUNT. + * if a type is a union, and the initializer from the constructor + is not the largest element in the union, then set *p_must_clear. + + Return whether or not CTOR is a valid static constant initializer, the same + as "initializer_constant_valid_p (CTOR, TREE_TYPE (CTOR)) != 0". */ + +bool +categorize_ctor_elements (tree ctor, HOST_WIDE_INT *p_nz_elts, + HOST_WIDE_INT *p_elt_count, + bool *p_must_clear) +{ + *p_nz_elts = 0; + *p_elt_count = 0; + *p_must_clear = false; + + return + categorize_ctor_elements_1 (ctor, p_nz_elts, p_elt_count, p_must_clear); +} + +/* Count the number of scalars in TYPE. Return -1 on overflow or + variable-sized. If ALLOW_FLEXARR is true, don't count flexible + array member at the end of the structure. */ + +HOST_WIDE_INT +count_type_elements (tree type, bool allow_flexarr) +{ + const HOST_WIDE_INT max = ~((HOST_WIDE_INT)1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT-1)); + switch (TREE_CODE (type)) + { + case ARRAY_TYPE: + { + tree telts = array_type_nelts (type); + if (telts && host_integerp (telts, 1)) + { + HOST_WIDE_INT n = tree_low_cst (telts, 1) + 1; + HOST_WIDE_INT m = count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (type), false); + if (n == 0) + return 0; + else if (max / n > m) + return n * m; + } + return -1; + } + + case RECORD_TYPE: + { + HOST_WIDE_INT n = 0, t; + tree f; + + for (f = TYPE_FIELDS (type); f ; f = TREE_CHAIN (f)) + if (TREE_CODE (f) == FIELD_DECL) + { + t = count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (f), false); + if (t < 0) + { + /* Check for structures with flexible array member. */ + tree tf = TREE_TYPE (f); + if (allow_flexarr + && TREE_CHAIN (f) == NULL + && TREE_CODE (tf) == ARRAY_TYPE + && TYPE_DOMAIN (tf) + && TYPE_MIN_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf)) + && integer_zerop (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf))) + && !TYPE_MAX_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf)) + && int_size_in_bytes (type) >= 0) + break; + + return -1; + } + n += t; + } + + return n; + } + + case UNION_TYPE: + case QUAL_UNION_TYPE: + { + /* Ho hum. How in the world do we guess here? Clearly it isn't + right to count the fields. Guess based on the number of words. */ + HOST_WIDE_INT n = int_size_in_bytes (type); + if (n < 0) + return -1; + return n / UNITS_PER_WORD; + } + + case COMPLEX_TYPE: + return 2; + + case VECTOR_TYPE: + return TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (type); + + case INTEGER_TYPE: + case REAL_TYPE: + case ENUMERAL_TYPE: + case BOOLEAN_TYPE: + case POINTER_TYPE: + case OFFSET_TYPE: + case REFERENCE_TYPE: + return 1; + + case VOID_TYPE: + case METHOD_TYPE: + case FUNCTION_TYPE: + case LANG_TYPE: + default: + gcc_unreachable (); + } +} + +/* Return 1 if EXP contains mostly (3/4) zeros. */ + +static int +mostly_zeros_p (tree exp) +{ + if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR) + + { + HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts, count, elts; + bool must_clear; + + categorize_ctor_elements (exp, &nz_elts, &count, &must_clear); + if (must_clear) + return 1; + + elts = count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (exp), false); + + return nz_elts < elts / 4; + } + + return initializer_zerop (exp); +} + +/* Return 1 if EXP contains all zeros. */ + +static int +all_zeros_p (tree exp) +{ + if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR) + + { + HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts, count; + bool must_clear; + + categorize_ctor_elements (exp, &nz_elts, &count, &must_clear); + return nz_elts == 0; + } + + return initializer_zerop (exp); +} + +/* Helper function for store_constructor. + TARGET, BITSIZE, BITPOS, MODE, EXP are as for store_field. + TYPE is the type of the CONSTRUCTOR, not the element type. + CLEARED is as for store_constructor. + ALIAS_SET is the alias set to use for any stores. + + This provides a recursive shortcut back to store_constructor when it isn't + necessary to go through store_field. This is so that we can pass through + the cleared field to let store_constructor know that we may not have to + clear a substructure if the outer structure has already been cleared. */ + +static void +store_constructor_field (rtx target, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize, + HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos, enum machine_mode mode, + tree exp, tree type, int cleared, int alias_set) +{ + if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR + /* We can only call store_constructor recursively if the size and + bit position are on a byte boundary. */ + && bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT == 0 + && (bitsize > 0 && bitsize % BITS_PER_UNIT == 0) + /* If we have a nonzero bitpos for a register target, then we just + let store_field do the bitfield handling. This is unlikely to + generate unnecessary clear instructions anyways. */ + && (bitpos == 0 || MEM_P (target))) + { + if (MEM_P (target)) + target + = adjust_address (target, + GET_MODE (target) == BLKmode + || 0 != (bitpos + % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (GET_MODE (target))) + ? BLKmode : VOIDmode, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT); + + + /* Update the alias set, if required. */ + if (MEM_P (target) && ! MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target) + && MEM_ALIAS_SET (target) != 0) + { + target = copy_rtx (target); + set_mem_alias_set (target, alias_set); + } + + store_constructor (exp, target, cleared, bitsize / BITS_PER_UNIT); + } + else + store_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, exp, type, alias_set); +} + +/* Store the value of constructor EXP into the rtx TARGET. + TARGET is either a REG or a MEM; we know it cannot conflict, since + safe_from_p has been called. + CLEARED is true if TARGET is known to have been zero'd. + SIZE is the number of bytes of TARGET we are allowed to modify: this + may not be the same as the size of EXP if we are assigning to a field + which has been packed to exclude padding bits. */ + +static void +store_constructor (tree exp, rtx target, int cleared, HOST_WIDE_INT size) +{ + tree type = TREE_TYPE (exp); +#ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS + HOST_WIDE_INT exp_size = int_size_in_bytes (type); +#endif + + switch (TREE_CODE (type)) + { + case RECORD_TYPE: + case UNION_TYPE: + case QUAL_UNION_TYPE: + { + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx; + tree field, value; + + /* If size is zero or the target is already cleared, do nothing. */ + if (size == 0 || cleared) + cleared = 1; + /* We either clear the aggregate or indicate the value is dead. */ + else if ((TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE + || TREE_CODE (type) == QUAL_UNION_TYPE) + && ! CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp)) + /* If the constructor is empty, clear the union. */ + { + clear_storage (target, expr_size (exp), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL); + cleared = 1; + } + + /* If we are building a static constructor into a register, + set the initial value as zero so we can fold the value into + a constant. But if more than one register is involved, + this probably loses. */ + else if (REG_P (target) && TREE_STATIC (exp) + && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target)) <= UNITS_PER_WORD) + { + emit_move_insn (target, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target))); + cleared = 1; + } + + /* If the constructor has fewer fields than the structure or + if we are initializing the structure to mostly zeros, clear + the whole structure first. Don't do this if TARGET is a + register whose mode size isn't equal to SIZE since + clear_storage can't handle this case. */ + else if (size > 0 + && (((int)VEC_length (constructor_elt, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp)) + != fields_length (type)) + || mostly_zeros_p (exp)) + && (!REG_P (target) + || ((HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target)) + == size))) + { + clear_storage (target, GEN_INT (size), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL); + cleared = 1; + } + + if (! cleared) + emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, target)); + + /* Store each element of the constructor into the + corresponding field of TARGET. */ + FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, field, value) + { + enum machine_mode mode; + HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize; + HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos = 0; + tree offset; + rtx to_rtx = target; + + /* Just ignore missing fields. We cleared the whole + structure, above, if any fields are missing. */ + if (field == 0) + continue; + + if (cleared && initializer_zerop (value)) + continue; + + if (host_integerp (DECL_SIZE (field), 1)) + bitsize = tree_low_cst (DECL_SIZE (field), 1); + else + bitsize = -1; + + mode = DECL_MODE (field); + if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field)) + mode = VOIDmode; + + offset = DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field); + if (host_integerp (offset, 0) + && host_integerp (bit_position (field), 0)) + { + bitpos = int_bit_position (field); + offset = 0; + } + else + bitpos = tree_low_cst (DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (field), 0); + + if (offset) + { + rtx offset_rtx; + + offset + = SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (offset, + make_tree (TREE_TYPE (exp), + target)); + + offset_rtx = expand_normal (offset); + gcc_assert (MEM_P (to_rtx)); + +#ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED + if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != Pmode) + offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (Pmode, offset_rtx, 0); +#else + if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != ptr_mode) + offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (ptr_mode, offset_rtx, 0); +#endif + + to_rtx = offset_address (to_rtx, offset_rtx, + highest_pow2_factor (offset)); + } + +#ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS + /* If this initializes a field that is smaller than a + word, at the start of a word, try to widen it to a full + word. This special case allows us to output C++ member + function initializations in a form that the optimizers + can understand. */ + if (REG_P (target) + && bitsize < BITS_PER_WORD + && bitpos % BITS_PER_WORD == 0 + && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT + && TREE_CODE (value) == INTEGER_CST + && exp_size >= 0 + && bitpos + BITS_PER_WORD <= exp_size * BITS_PER_UNIT) + { + tree type = TREE_TYPE (value); + + if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) < BITS_PER_WORD) + { + type = lang_hooks.types.type_for_size + (BITS_PER_WORD, TYPE_UNSIGNED (type)); + value = fold_convert (type, value); + } + + if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN) + value + = fold_build2 (LSHIFT_EXPR, type, value, + build_int_cst (type, + BITS_PER_WORD - bitsize)); + bitsize = BITS_PER_WORD; + mode = word_mode; + } +#endif + + if (MEM_P (to_rtx) && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx) + && DECL_NONADDRESSABLE_P (field)) + { + to_rtx = copy_rtx (to_rtx); + MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx) = 1; + } + + store_constructor_field (to_rtx, bitsize, bitpos, mode, + value, type, cleared, + get_alias_set (TREE_TYPE (field))); + } + break; + } + case ARRAY_TYPE: + { + tree value, index; + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT i; + int need_to_clear; + tree domain; + tree elttype = TREE_TYPE (type); + int const_bounds_p; + HOST_WIDE_INT minelt = 0; + HOST_WIDE_INT maxelt = 0; + + domain = TYPE_DOMAIN (type); + const_bounds_p = (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain) + && TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain) + && host_integerp (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain), 0) + && host_integerp (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain), 0)); + + /* If we have constant bounds for the range of the type, get them. */ + if (const_bounds_p) + { + minelt = tree_low_cst (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain), 0); + maxelt = tree_low_cst (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain), 0); + } + + /* If the constructor has fewer elements than the array, clear + the whole array first. Similarly if this is static + constructor of a non-BLKmode object. */ + if (cleared) + need_to_clear = 0; + else if (REG_P (target) && TREE_STATIC (exp)) + need_to_clear = 1; + else + { + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx; + tree index, value; + HOST_WIDE_INT count = 0, zero_count = 0; + need_to_clear = ! const_bounds_p; + + /* This loop is a more accurate version of the loop in + mostly_zeros_p (it handles RANGE_EXPR in an index). It + is also needed to check for missing elements. */ + FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, index, value) + { + HOST_WIDE_INT this_node_count; + + if (need_to_clear) + break; + + if (index != NULL_TREE && TREE_CODE (index) == RANGE_EXPR) + { + tree lo_index = TREE_OPERAND (index, 0); + tree hi_index = TREE_OPERAND (index, 1); + + if (! host_integerp (lo_index, 1) + || ! host_integerp (hi_index, 1)) + { + need_to_clear = 1; + break; + } + + this_node_count = (tree_low_cst (hi_index, 1) + - tree_low_cst (lo_index, 1) + 1); + } + else + this_node_count = 1; + + count += this_node_count; + if (mostly_zeros_p (value)) + zero_count += this_node_count; + } + + /* Clear the entire array first if there are any missing + elements, or if the incidence of zero elements is >= + 75%. */ + if (! need_to_clear + && (count < maxelt - minelt + 1 + || 4 * zero_count >= 3 * count)) + need_to_clear = 1; + } + + if (need_to_clear && size > 0) + { + if (REG_P (target)) + emit_move_insn (target, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target))); + else + clear_storage (target, GEN_INT (size), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL); + cleared = 1; + } + + if (!cleared && REG_P (target)) + /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead. */ + emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, target)); + + /* Store each element of the constructor into the + corresponding element of TARGET, determined by counting the + elements. */ + FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), i, index, value) + { + enum machine_mode mode; + HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize; + HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos; + int unsignedp; + rtx xtarget = target; + + if (cleared && initializer_zerop (value)) + continue; + + unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (elttype); + mode = TYPE_MODE (elttype); + if (mode == BLKmode) + bitsize = (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1) + ? tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1) + : -1); + else + bitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode); + + if (index != NULL_TREE && TREE_CODE (index) == RANGE_EXPR) + { + tree lo_index = TREE_OPERAND (index, 0); + tree hi_index = TREE_OPERAND (index, 1); + rtx index_r, pos_rtx; + HOST_WIDE_INT lo, hi, count; + tree position; + + /* If the range is constant and "small", unroll the loop. */ + if (const_bounds_p + && host_integerp (lo_index, 0) + && host_integerp (hi_index, 0) + && (lo = tree_low_cst (lo_index, 0), + hi = tree_low_cst (hi_index, 0), + count = hi - lo + 1, + (!MEM_P (target) + || count <= 2 + || (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1) + && (tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1) * count + <= 40 * 8))))) + { + lo -= minelt; hi -= minelt; + for (; lo <= hi; lo++) + { + bitpos = lo * tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 0); + + if (MEM_P (target) + && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target) + && TREE_CODE (type) == ARRAY_TYPE + && TYPE_NONALIASED_COMPONENT (type)) + { + target = copy_rtx (target); + MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target) = 1; + } + + store_constructor_field + (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, value, type, cleared, + get_alias_set (elttype)); + } + } + else + { + rtx loop_start = gen_label_rtx (); + rtx loop_end = gen_label_rtx (); + tree exit_cond; + + expand_normal (hi_index); + unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (domain); + + index = build_decl (VAR_DECL, NULL_TREE, domain); + + index_r + = gen_reg_rtx (promote_mode (domain, DECL_MODE (index), + &unsignedp, 0)); + SET_DECL_RTL (index, index_r); + store_expr (lo_index, index_r, 0); + + /* Build the head of the loop. */ + do_pending_stack_adjust (); + emit_label (loop_start); + + /* Assign value to element index. */ + position = + fold_convert (ssizetype, + fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR, + TREE_TYPE (index), + index, + TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain))); + + position = + size_binop (MULT_EXPR, position, + fold_convert (ssizetype, + TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elttype))); + + pos_rtx = expand_normal (position); + xtarget = offset_address (target, pos_rtx, + highest_pow2_factor (position)); + xtarget = adjust_address (xtarget, mode, 0); + if (TREE_CODE (value) == CONSTRUCTOR) + store_constructor (value, xtarget, cleared, + bitsize / BITS_PER_UNIT); + else + store_expr (value, xtarget, 0); + + /* Generate a conditional jump to exit the loop. */ + exit_cond = build2 (LT_EXPR, integer_type_node, + index, hi_index); + jumpif (exit_cond, loop_end); + + /* Update the loop counter, and jump to the head of + the loop. */ + expand_assignment (index, + build2 (PLUS_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (index), + index, integer_one_node)); + + emit_jump (loop_start); + + /* Build the end of the loop. */ + emit_label (loop_end); + } + } + else if ((index != 0 && ! host_integerp (index, 0)) + || ! host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1)) + { + tree position; + + if (index == 0) + index = ssize_int (1); + + if (minelt) + index = fold_convert (ssizetype, + fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR, + TREE_TYPE (index), + index, + TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain))); + + position = + size_binop (MULT_EXPR, index, + fold_convert (ssizetype, + TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elttype))); + xtarget = offset_address (target, + expand_normal (position), + highest_pow2_factor (position)); + xtarget = adjust_address (xtarget, mode, 0); + store_expr (value, xtarget, 0); + } + else + { + if (index != 0) + bitpos = ((tree_low_cst (index, 0) - minelt) + * tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1)); + else + bitpos = (i * tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1)); + + if (MEM_P (target) && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target) + && TREE_CODE (type) == ARRAY_TYPE + && TYPE_NONALIASED_COMPONENT (type)) + { + target = copy_rtx (target); + MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target) = 1; + } + store_constructor_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, value, + type, cleared, get_alias_set (elttype)); + } + } + break; + } + + case VECTOR_TYPE: + { + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx; + constructor_elt *ce; + int i; + int need_to_clear; + int icode = 0; + tree elttype = TREE_TYPE (type); + int elt_size = tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1); + enum machine_mode eltmode = TYPE_MODE (elttype); + HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize; + HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos; + rtvec vector = NULL; + unsigned n_elts; + + gcc_assert (eltmode != BLKmode); + + n_elts = TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (type); + if (REG_P (target) && VECTOR_MODE_P (GET_MODE (target))) + { + enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (target); + + icode = (int) vec_init_optab->handlers[mode].insn_code; + if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing) + { + unsigned int i; + + vector = rtvec_alloc (n_elts); + for (i = 0; i < n_elts; i++) + RTVEC_ELT (vector, i) = CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE_INNER (mode)); + } + } + + /* If the constructor has fewer elements than the vector, + clear the whole array first. Similarly if this is static + constructor of a non-BLKmode object. */ + if (cleared) + need_to_clear = 0; + else if (REG_P (target) && TREE_STATIC (exp)) + need_to_clear = 1; + else + { + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT count = 0, zero_count = 0; + tree value; + + FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_VALUE (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, value) + { + int n_elts_here = tree_low_cst + (int_const_binop (TRUNC_DIV_EXPR, + TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (value)), + TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 0), 1); + + count += n_elts_here; + if (mostly_zeros_p (value)) + zero_count += n_elts_here; + } + + /* Clear the entire vector first if there are any missing elements, + or if the incidence of zero elements is >= 75%. */ + need_to_clear = (count < n_elts || 4 * zero_count >= 3 * count); + } + + if (need_to_clear && size > 0 && !vector) + { + if (REG_P (target)) + emit_move_insn (target, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target))); + else + clear_storage (target, GEN_INT (size), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL); + cleared = 1; + } + + /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead. */ + if (!cleared && !vector && REG_P (target)) + emit_move_insn (target, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target))); + + /* Store each element of the constructor into the corresponding + element of TARGET, determined by counting the elements. */ + for (idx = 0, i = 0; + VEC_iterate (constructor_elt, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, ce); + idx++, i += bitsize / elt_size) + { + HOST_WIDE_INT eltpos; + tree value = ce->value; + + bitsize = tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (value)), 1); + if (cleared && initializer_zerop (value)) + continue; + + if (ce->index) + eltpos = tree_low_cst (ce->index, 1); + else + eltpos = i; + + if (vector) + { + /* Vector CONSTRUCTORs should only be built from smaller + vectors in the case of BLKmode vectors. */ + gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (value)) != VECTOR_TYPE); + RTVEC_ELT (vector, eltpos) + = expand_normal (value); + } + else + { + enum machine_mode value_mode = + TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (value)) == VECTOR_TYPE + ? TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (value)) + : eltmode; + bitpos = eltpos * elt_size; + store_constructor_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, + value_mode, value, type, + cleared, get_alias_set (elttype)); + } + } + + if (vector) + emit_insn (GEN_FCN (icode) + (target, + gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (target), vector))); + break; + } + + default: + gcc_unreachable (); + } +} + +/* Store the value of EXP (an expression tree) + into a subfield of TARGET which has mode MODE and occupies + BITSIZE bits, starting BITPOS bits from the start of TARGET. + If MODE is VOIDmode, it means that we are storing into a bit-field. + + Always return const0_rtx unless we have something particular to + return. + + TYPE is the type of the underlying object, + + ALIAS_SET is the alias set for the destination. This value will + (in general) be different from that for TARGET, since TARGET is a + reference to the containing structure. */ + +static rtx +store_field (rtx target, HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize, HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos, + enum machine_mode mode, tree exp, tree type, int alias_set) +{ + HOST_WIDE_INT width_mask = 0; + + if (TREE_CODE (exp) == ERROR_MARK) + return const0_rtx; + + /* If we have nothing to store, do nothing unless the expression has + side-effects. */ + if (bitsize == 0) + return expand_expr (exp, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0); + else if (bitsize >= 0 && bitsize < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) + width_mask = ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << bitsize) - 1; + + /* If we are storing into an unaligned field of an aligned union that is + in a register, we may have the mode of TARGET being an integer mode but + MODE == BLKmode. In that case, get an aligned object whose size and + alignment are the same as TARGET and store TARGET into it (we can avoid + the store if the field being stored is the entire width of TARGET). Then + call ourselves recursively to store the field into a BLKmode version of + that object. Finally, load from the object into TARGET. This is not + very efficient in general, but should only be slightly more expensive + than the otherwise-required unaligned accesses. Perhaps this can be + cleaned up later. It's tempting to make OBJECT readonly, but it's set + twice, once with emit_move_insn and once via store_field. */ + + if (mode == BLKmode + && (REG_P (target) || GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG)) + { + rtx object = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 1); + rtx blk_object = adjust_address (object, BLKmode, 0); + + if (bitsize != (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (target))) + emit_move_insn (object, target); + + store_field (blk_object, bitsize, bitpos, mode, exp, type, alias_set); + + emit_move_insn (target, object); + + /* We want to return the BLKmode version of the data. */ + return blk_object; + } + + if (GET_CODE (target) == CONCAT) + { + /* We're storing into a struct containing a single __complex. */ + + gcc_assert (!bitpos); + return store_expr (exp, target, 0); + } + + /* If the structure is in a register or if the component + is a bit field, we cannot use addressing to access it. + Use bit-field techniques or SUBREG to store in it. */ + + if (mode == VOIDmode + || (mode != BLKmode && ! direct_store[(int) mode] + && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT + && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT) + || REG_P (target) + || GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG + /* If the field isn't aligned enough to store as an ordinary memref, + store it as a bit field. */ + || (mode != BLKmode + && ((((MEM_ALIGN (target) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)) + || bitpos % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)) + && SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode, MEM_ALIGN (target))) + || (bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT != 0))) + /* If the RHS and field are a constant size and the size of the + RHS isn't the same size as the bitfield, we must use bitfield + operations. */ + || (bitsize >= 0 + && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))) == INTEGER_CST + && compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)), bitsize) != 0)) + { + rtx temp; + + /* If EXP is a NOP_EXPR of precision less than its mode, then that + implies a mask operation. If the precision is the same size as + the field we're storing into, that mask is redundant. This is + particularly common with bit field assignments generated by the + C front end. */ + if (TREE_CODE (exp) == NOP_EXPR) + { + tree type = TREE_TYPE (exp); + if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type) + && TYPE_PRECISION (type) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (type)) + && bitsize == TYPE_PRECISION (type)) + { + type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type) && TYPE_PRECISION (type) >= bitsize) + exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0); + } + } + + temp = expand_normal (exp); + + /* If BITSIZE is narrower than the size of the type of EXP + we will be narrowing TEMP. Normally, what's wanted are the + low-order bits. However, if EXP's type is a record and this is + big-endian machine, we want the upper BITSIZE bits. */ + if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (temp)) == MODE_INT + && bitsize < (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (temp)) + && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == RECORD_TYPE) + temp = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (temp), temp, + size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (temp)) + - bitsize), + NULL_RTX, 1); + + /* Unless MODE is VOIDmode or BLKmode, convert TEMP to + MODE. */ + if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != BLKmode + && mode != TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp))) + temp = convert_modes (mode, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)), temp, 1); + + /* If the modes of TARGET and TEMP are both BLKmode, both + must be in memory and BITPOS must be aligned on a byte + boundary. If so, we simply do a block copy. */ + if (GET_MODE (target) == BLKmode && GET_MODE (temp) == BLKmode) + { + gcc_assert (MEM_P (target) && MEM_P (temp) + && !(bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT)); + + target = adjust_address (target, VOIDmode, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT); + emit_block_move (target, temp, + GEN_INT ((bitsize + BITS_PER_UNIT - 1) + / BITS_PER_UNIT), + BLOCK_OP_NORMAL); + + return const0_rtx; + } + + /* Store the value in the bitfield. */ + store_bit_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, temp); + + return const0_rtx; + } + else + { + /* Now build a reference to just the desired component. */ + rtx to_rtx = adjust_address (target, mode, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT); + + if (to_rtx == target) + to_rtx = copy_rtx (to_rtx); + + MEM_SET_IN_STRUCT_P (to_rtx, 1); + if (!MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx) && MEM_ALIAS_SET (to_rtx) != 0) + set_mem_alias_set (to_rtx, alias_set); + + return store_expr (exp, to_rtx, 0); + } +} + +/* Given an expression EXP that may be a COMPONENT_REF, a BIT_FIELD_REF, + an ARRAY_REF, or an ARRAY_RANGE_REF, look for nested operations of these + codes and find the ultimate containing object, which we return. + + We set *PBITSIZE to the size in bits that we want, *PBITPOS to the + bit position, and *PUNSIGNEDP to the signedness of the field. + If the position of the field is variable, we store a tree + giving the variable offset (in units) in *POFFSET. + This offset is in addition to the bit position. + If the position is not variable, we store 0 in *POFFSET. + + If any of the extraction expressions is volatile, + we store 1 in *PVOLATILEP. Otherwise we don't change that. + + If the field is a bit-field, *PMODE is set to VOIDmode. Otherwise, it + is a mode that can be used to access the field. In that case, *PBITSIZE + is redundant. + + If the field describes a variable-sized object, *PMODE is set to + VOIDmode and *PBITSIZE is set to -1. An access cannot be made in + this case, but the address of the object can be found. + + If KEEP_ALIGNING is true and the target is STRICT_ALIGNMENT, we don't + look through nodes that serve as markers of a greater alignment than + the one that can be deduced from the expression. These nodes make it + possible for front-ends to prevent temporaries from being created by + the middle-end on alignment considerations. For that purpose, the + normal operating mode at high-level is to always pass FALSE so that + the ultimate containing object is really returned; moreover, the + associated predicate handled_component_p will always return TRUE + on these nodes, thus indicating that they are essentially handled + by get_inner_reference. TRUE should only be passed when the caller + is scanning the expression in order to build another representation + and specifically knows how to handle these nodes; as such, this is + the normal operating mode in the RTL expanders. */ + +tree +get_inner_reference (tree exp, HOST_WIDE_INT *pbitsize, + HOST_WIDE_INT *pbitpos, tree *poffset, + enum machine_mode *pmode, int *punsignedp, + int *pvolatilep, bool keep_aligning) +{ + tree size_tree = 0; + enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode; + tree offset = size_zero_node; + tree bit_offset = bitsize_zero_node; + tree tem; + + /* First get the mode, signedness, and size. We do this from just the + outermost expression. */ + if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPONENT_REF) + { + size_tree = DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)); + if (! DECL_BIT_FIELD (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) + mode = DECL_MODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)); + + *punsignedp = DECL_UNSIGNED (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)); + } + else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == BIT_FIELD_REF) + { + size_tree = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1); + *punsignedp = BIT_FIELD_REF_UNSIGNED (exp); + } + else + { + mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)); + *punsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp)); + + if (mode == BLKmode) + size_tree = TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)); + else + *pbitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode); + } + + if (size_tree != 0) + { + if (! host_integerp (size_tree, 1)) + mode = BLKmode, *pbitsize = -1; + else + *pbitsize = tree_low_cst (size_tree, 1); + } + + /* Compute cumulative bit-offset for nested component-refs and array-refs, + and find the ultimate containing object. */ + while (1) + { + switch (TREE_CODE (exp)) + { + case BIT_FIELD_REF: + bit_offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, bit_offset, + TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)); + break; + + case COMPONENT_REF: + { + tree field = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1); + tree this_offset = component_ref_field_offset (exp); + + /* If this field hasn't been filled in yet, don't go past it. + This should only happen when folding expressions made during + type construction. */ + if (this_offset == 0) + break; + + offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, offset, this_offset); + bit_offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, bit_offset, + DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (field)); + + /* ??? Right now we don't do anything with DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN. */ + } + break; + + case ARRAY_REF: + case ARRAY_RANGE_REF: + { + tree index = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1); + tree low_bound = array_ref_low_bound (exp); + tree unit_size = array_ref_element_size (exp); + + /* We assume all arrays have sizes that are a multiple of a byte. + First subtract the lower bound, if any, in the type of the + index, then convert to sizetype and multiply by the size of + the array element. */ + if (! integer_zerop (low_bound)) + index = fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (index), + index, low_bound); + + offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, offset, + size_binop (MULT_EXPR, + fold_convert (sizetype, index), + unit_size)); + } + break; + + case REALPART_EXPR: + break; + + case IMAGPART_EXPR: + bit_offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, bit_offset, + bitsize_int (*pbitsize)); + break; + + case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR: + if (keep_aligning && STRICT_ALIGNMENT + && (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp)) + > TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))) + && (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) + < BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT) + && (TYPE_ALIGN_OK (TREE_TYPE (exp)) + || TYPE_ALIGN_OK (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))) + goto done; + break; + + default: + goto done; + } + + /* If any reference in the chain is volatile, the effect is volatile. */ + if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp)) + *pvolatilep = 1; + + exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0); + } + done: + + /* If OFFSET is constant, see if we can return the whole thing as a + constant bit position. Otherwise, split it up. */ + if (host_integerp (offset, 0) + && 0 != (tem = size_binop (MULT_EXPR, + fold_convert (bitsizetype, offset), + bitsize_unit_node)) + && 0 != (tem = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, tem, bit_offset)) + && host_integerp (tem, 0)) + *pbitpos = tree_low_cst (tem, 0), *poffset = 0; + else + *pbitpos = tree_low_cst (bit_offset, 0), *poffset = offset; + + *pmode = mode; + return exp; +} + +/* Return a tree of sizetype representing the size, in bytes, of the element + of EXP, an ARRAY_REF. */ + +tree +array_ref_element_size (tree exp) +{ + tree aligned_size = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 3); + tree elmt_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))); + + /* If a size was specified in the ARRAY_REF, it's the size measured + in alignment units of the element type. So multiply by that value. */ + if (aligned_size) + { + /* ??? tree_ssa_useless_type_conversion will eliminate casts to + sizetype from another type of the same width and signedness. */ + if (TREE_TYPE (aligned_size) != sizetype) + aligned_size = fold_convert (sizetype, aligned_size); + return size_binop (MULT_EXPR, aligned_size, + size_int (TYPE_ALIGN_UNIT (elmt_type))); + } + + /* Otherwise, take the size from that of the element type. Substitute + any PLACEHOLDER_EXPR that we have. */ + else + return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elmt_type), exp); +} + +/* Return a tree representing the lower bound of the array mentioned in + EXP, an ARRAY_REF. */ + +tree +array_ref_low_bound (tree exp) +{ + tree domain_type = TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))); + + /* If a lower bound is specified in EXP, use it. */ + if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) + return TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2); + + /* Otherwise, if there is a domain type and it has a lower bound, use it, + substituting for a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR as needed. */ + if (domain_type && TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain_type)) + return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain_type), exp); + + /* Otherwise, return a zero of the appropriate type. */ + return build_int_cst (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)), 0); +} + +/* Return a tree representing the upper bound of the array mentioned in + EXP, an ARRAY_REF. */ + +tree +array_ref_up_bound (tree exp) +{ + tree domain_type = TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))); + + /* If there is a domain type and it has an upper bound, use it, substituting + for a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR as needed. */ + if (domain_type && TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain_type)) + return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain_type), exp); + + /* Otherwise fail. */ + return NULL_TREE; +} + +/* Return a tree representing the offset, in bytes, of the field referenced + by EXP. This does not include any offset in DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET. */ + +tree +component_ref_field_offset (tree exp) +{ + tree aligned_offset = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2); + tree field = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1); + + /* If an offset was specified in the COMPONENT_REF, it's the offset measured + in units of DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN / BITS_PER_UNIT. So multiply by that + value. */ + if (aligned_offset) + { + /* ??? tree_ssa_useless_type_conversion will eliminate casts to + sizetype from another type of the same width and signedness. */ + if (TREE_TYPE (aligned_offset) != sizetype) + aligned_offset = fold_convert (sizetype, aligned_offset); + return size_binop (MULT_EXPR, aligned_offset, + size_int (DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN (field) / BITS_PER_UNIT)); + } + + /* Otherwise, take the offset from that of the field. Substitute + any PLACEHOLDER_EXPR that we have. */ + else + return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field), exp); +} + +/* Return 1 if T is an expression that get_inner_reference handles. */ + +int +handled_component_p (tree t) +{ + switch (TREE_CODE (t)) + { + case BIT_FIELD_REF: + case COMPONENT_REF: + case ARRAY_REF: + case ARRAY_RANGE_REF: + case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR: + case REALPART_EXPR: + case IMAGPART_EXPR: + return 1; + + default: + return 0; + } +} + +/* Given an rtx VALUE that may contain additions and multiplications, return + an equivalent value that just refers to a register, memory, or constant. + This is done by generating instructions to perform the arithmetic and + returning a pseudo-register containing the value. + + The returned value may be a REG, SUBREG, MEM or constant. */ + +rtx +force_operand (rtx value, rtx target) +{ + rtx op1, op2; + /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */ + rtx subtarget = get_subtarget (target); + enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (value); + + /* Check for subreg applied to an expression produced by loop optimizer. */ + if (code == SUBREG + && !REG_P (SUBREG_REG (value)) + && !MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (value))) + { + value = simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (value), + force_reg (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)), + force_operand (SUBREG_REG (value), + NULL_RTX)), + GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)), + SUBREG_BYTE (value)); + code = GET_CODE (value); + } + + /* Check for a PIC address load. */ + if ((code == PLUS || code == MINUS) + && XEXP (value, 0) == pic_offset_table_rtx + && (GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF + || GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 1)) == LABEL_REF + || GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 1)) == CONST)) + { + if (!subtarget) + subtarget = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (value)); + emit_move_insn (subtarget, value); + return subtarget; + } + + if (ARITHMETIC_P (value)) + { + op2 = XEXP (value, 1); + if (!CONSTANT_P (op2) && !(REG_P (op2) && op2 != subtarget)) + subtarget = 0; + if (code == MINUS && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT) + { + code = PLUS; + op2 = negate_rtx (GET_MODE (value), op2); + } + + /* Check for an addition with OP2 a constant integer and our first + operand a PLUS of a virtual register and something else. In that + case, we want to emit the sum of the virtual register and the + constant first and then add the other value. This allows virtual + register instantiation to simply modify the constant rather than + creating another one around this addition. */ + if (code == PLUS && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT + && GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 0)) == PLUS + && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0)) + && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0)) >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER + && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0)) <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER) + { + rtx temp = expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, + XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0), op2, + subtarget, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN); + return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, temp, + force_operand (XEXP (XEXP (value, + 0), 1), 0), + target, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN); + } + + op1 = force_operand (XEXP (value, 0), subtarget); + op2 = force_operand (op2, NULL_RTX); + switch (code) + { + case MULT: + return expand_mult (GET_MODE (value), op1, op2, target, 1); + case DIV: + if (!INTEGRAL_MODE_P (GET_MODE (value))) + return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, op1, op2, + target, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN); + else + return expand_divmod (0, + FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (value)) + ? RDIV_EXPR : TRUNC_DIV_EXPR, + GET_MODE (value), op1, op2, target, 0); + break; + case MOD: + return expand_divmod (1, TRUNC_MOD_EXPR, GET_MODE (value), op1, op2, + target, 0); + break; + case UDIV: + return expand_divmod (0, TRUNC_DIV_EXPR, GET_MODE (value), op1, op2, + target, 1); + break; + case UMOD: + return expand_divmod (1, TRUNC_MOD_EXPR, GET_MODE (value), op1, op2, + target, 1); + break; + case ASHIFTRT: + return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, op1, op2, + target, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN); + break; + default: + return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, op1, op2, + target, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN); + } + } + if (UNARY_P (value)) + { + if (!target) + target = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (value)); + op1 = force_operand (XEXP (value, 0), NULL_RTX); + switch (code) + { + case ZERO_EXTEND: + case SIGN_EXTEND: + case TRUNCATE: + case FLOAT_EXTEND: + case FLOAT_TRUNCATE: + convert_move (target, op1, code == ZERO_EXTEND); + return target; + + case FIX: + case UNSIGNED_FIX: + expand_fix (target, op1, code == UNSIGNED_FIX); + return target; + + case FLOAT: + case UNSIGNED_FLOAT: + expand_float (target, op1, code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT); + return target; + + default: + return expand_simple_unop (GET_MODE (value), code, op1, target, 0); + } + } + +#ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING + /* On machines that have insn scheduling, we want all memory reference to be + explicit, so we need to deal with such paradoxical SUBREGs. */ + if (GET_CODE (value) == SUBREG && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (value)) + && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (value)) + > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value))))) + value + = simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (value), + force_reg (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)), + force_operand (SUBREG_REG (value), + NULL_RTX)), + GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)), + SUBREG_BYTE (value)); +#endif + + return value; +} + +/* Subroutine of expand_expr: return nonzero iff there is no way that + EXP can reference X, which is being modified. TOP_P is nonzero if this + call is going to be used to determine whether we need a temporary + for EXP, as opposed to a recursive call to this function. + + It is always safe for this routine to return zero since it merely + searches for optimization opportunities. */ + +int +safe_from_p (rtx x, tree exp, int top_p) +{ + rtx exp_rtl = 0; + int i, nops; + + if (x == 0 + /* If EXP has varying size, we MUST use a target since we currently + have no way of allocating temporaries of variable size + (except for arrays that have TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE set). + So we assume here that something at a higher level has prevented a + clash. This is somewhat bogus, but the best we can do. Only + do this when X is BLKmode and when we are at the top level. */ + || (top_p && TREE_TYPE (exp) != 0 && COMPLETE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp)) + && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))) != INTEGER_CST + && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) != ARRAY_TYPE + || TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == NULL_TREE + || TREE_CODE (TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))) + != INTEGER_CST) + && GET_MODE (x) == BLKmode) + /* If X is in the outgoing argument area, it is always safe. */ + || (MEM_P (x) + && (XEXP (x, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx + || (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS + && XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx)))) + return 1; + + /* If this is a subreg of a hard register, declare it unsafe, otherwise, + find the underlying pseudo. */ + if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG) + { + x = SUBREG_REG (x); + if (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) + return 0; + } + + /* Now look at our tree code and possibly recurse. */ + switch (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp))) + { + case tcc_declaration: + exp_rtl = DECL_RTL_IF_SET (exp); + break; + + case tcc_constant: + return 1; + + case tcc_exceptional: + if (TREE_CODE (exp) == TREE_LIST) + { + while (1) + { + if (TREE_VALUE (exp) && !safe_from_p (x, TREE_VALUE (exp), 0)) + return 0; + exp = TREE_CHAIN (exp); + if (!exp) + return 1; + if (TREE_CODE (exp) != TREE_LIST) + return safe_from_p (x, exp, 0); + } + } + else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR) + { + constructor_elt *ce; + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx; + + for (idx = 0; + VEC_iterate (constructor_elt, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, ce); + idx++) + if ((ce->index != NULL_TREE && !safe_from_p (x, ce->index, 0)) + || !safe_from_p (x, ce->value, 0)) + return 0; + return 1; + } + else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == ERROR_MARK) + return 1; /* An already-visited SAVE_EXPR? */ + else + return 0; + + case tcc_statement: + /* The only case we look at here is the DECL_INITIAL inside a + DECL_EXPR. */ + return (TREE_CODE (exp) != DECL_EXPR + || TREE_CODE (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp)) != VAR_DECL + || !DECL_INITIAL (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp)) + || safe_from_p (x, DECL_INITIAL (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp)), 0)); + + case tcc_binary: + case tcc_comparison: + if (!safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0)) + return 0; + /* Fall through. */ + + case tcc_unary: + return safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0); + + case tcc_expression: + case tcc_reference: + /* Now do code-specific tests. EXP_RTL is set to any rtx we find in + the expression. If it is set, we conflict iff we are that rtx or + both are in memory. Otherwise, we check all operands of the + expression recursively. */ + + switch (TREE_CODE (exp)) + { + case ADDR_EXPR: + /* If the operand is static or we are static, we can't conflict. + Likewise if we don't conflict with the operand at all. */ + if (staticp (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) + || TREE_STATIC (exp) + || safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)) + return 1; + + /* Otherwise, the only way this can conflict is if we are taking + the address of a DECL a that address if part of X, which is + very rare. */ + exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0); + if (DECL_P (exp)) + { + if (!DECL_RTL_SET_P (exp) + || !MEM_P (DECL_RTL (exp))) + return 0; + else + exp_rtl = XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0); + } + break; + + case MISALIGNED_INDIRECT_REF: + case ALIGN_INDIRECT_REF: + case INDIRECT_REF: + if (MEM_P (x) + && alias_sets_conflict_p (MEM_ALIAS_SET (x), + get_alias_set (exp))) + return 0; + break; + + case CALL_EXPR: + /* Assume that the call will clobber all hard registers and + all of memory. */ + if ((REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) + || MEM_P (x)) + return 0; + break; + + case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR: + case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR: + /* Lowered by gimplify.c. */ + gcc_unreachable (); + + case SAVE_EXPR: + return safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0); + + default: + break; + } + + /* If we have an rtx, we do not need to scan our operands. */ + if (exp_rtl) + break; + + nops = TREE_CODE_LENGTH (TREE_CODE (exp)); + for (i = 0; i < nops; i++) + if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, i) != 0 + && ! safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, i), 0)) + return 0; + + /* If this is a language-specific tree code, it may require + special handling. */ + if ((unsigned int) TREE_CODE (exp) + >= (unsigned int) LAST_AND_UNUSED_TREE_CODE + && !lang_hooks.safe_from_p (x, exp)) + return 0; + break; + + case tcc_type: + /* Should never get a type here. */ + gcc_unreachable (); + } + + /* If we have an rtl, find any enclosed object. Then see if we conflict + with it. */ + if (exp_rtl) + { + if (GET_CODE (exp_rtl) == SUBREG) + { + exp_rtl = SUBREG_REG (exp_rtl); + if (REG_P (exp_rtl) + && REGNO (exp_rtl) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) + return 0; + } + + /* If the rtl is X, then it is not safe. Otherwise, it is unless both + are memory and they conflict. */ + return ! (rtx_equal_p (x, exp_rtl) + || (MEM_P (x) && MEM_P (exp_rtl) + && true_dependence (exp_rtl, VOIDmode, x, + rtx_addr_varies_p))); + } + + /* If we reach here, it is safe. */ + return 1; +} + + +/* Return the highest power of two that EXP is known to be a multiple of. + This is used in updating alignment of MEMs in array references. */ + +unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT +highest_pow2_factor (tree exp) +{ + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT c0, c1; + + switch (TREE_CODE (exp)) + { + case INTEGER_CST: + /* We can find the lowest bit that's a one. If the low + HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT bits are zero, return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. + We need to handle this case since we can find it in a COND_EXPR, + a MIN_EXPR, or a MAX_EXPR. If the constant overflows, we have an + erroneous program, so return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT to avoid any + later ICE. */ + if (TREE_CONSTANT_OVERFLOW (exp)) + return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT; + else + { + /* Note: tree_low_cst is intentionally not used here, + we don't care about the upper bits. */ + c0 = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp); + c0 &= -c0; + return c0 ? c0 : BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT; + } + break; + + case PLUS_EXPR: case MINUS_EXPR: case MIN_EXPR: case MAX_EXPR: + c0 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + c1 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)); + return MIN (c0, c1); + + case MULT_EXPR: + c0 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + c1 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)); + return c0 * c1; + + case ROUND_DIV_EXPR: case TRUNC_DIV_EXPR: case FLOOR_DIV_EXPR: + case CEIL_DIV_EXPR: + if (integer_pow2p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) + && host_integerp (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1)) + { + c0 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + c1 = tree_low_cst (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1); + return MAX (1, c0 / c1); + } + break; + + case NON_LVALUE_EXPR: case NOP_EXPR: case CONVERT_EXPR: + case SAVE_EXPR: + return highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + + case COMPOUND_EXPR: + return highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)); + + case COND_EXPR: + c0 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)); + c1 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)); + return MIN (c0, c1); + + default: + break; + } + + return 1; +} + +/* Similar, except that the alignment requirements of TARGET are + taken into account. Assume it is at least as aligned as its + type, unless it is a COMPONENT_REF in which case the layout of + the structure gives the alignment. */ + +static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT +highest_pow2_factor_for_target (tree target, tree exp) +{ + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT target_align, factor; + + factor = highest_pow2_factor (exp); + if (TREE_CODE (target) == COMPONENT_REF) + target_align = DECL_ALIGN_UNIT (TREE_OPERAND (target, 1)); + else + target_align = TYPE_ALIGN_UNIT (TREE_TYPE (target)); + return MAX (factor, target_align); +} + +/* Expands variable VAR. */ + +void +expand_var (tree var) +{ + if (DECL_EXTERNAL (var)) + return; + + if (TREE_STATIC (var)) + /* If this is an inlined copy of a static local variable, + look up the original decl. */ + var = DECL_ORIGIN (var); + + if (TREE_STATIC (var) + ? !TREE_ASM_WRITTEN (var) + : !DECL_RTL_SET_P (var)) + { + if (TREE_CODE (var) == VAR_DECL && DECL_HAS_VALUE_EXPR_P (var)) + /* Should be ignored. */; + else if (lang_hooks.expand_decl (var)) + /* OK. */; + else if (TREE_CODE (var) == VAR_DECL && !TREE_STATIC (var)) + expand_decl (var); + else if (TREE_CODE (var) == VAR_DECL && TREE_STATIC (var)) + rest_of_decl_compilation (var, 0, 0); + else + /* No expansion needed. */ + gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (var) == TYPE_DECL + || TREE_CODE (var) == CONST_DECL + || TREE_CODE (var) == FUNCTION_DECL + || TREE_CODE (var) == LABEL_DECL); + } +} + +/* Subroutine of expand_expr. Expand the two operands of a binary + expression EXP0 and EXP1 placing the results in OP0 and OP1. + The value may be stored in TARGET if TARGET is nonzero. The + MODIFIER argument is as documented by expand_expr. */ + +static void +expand_operands (tree exp0, tree exp1, rtx target, rtx *op0, rtx *op1, + enum expand_modifier modifier) +{ + if (! safe_from_p (target, exp1, 1)) + target = 0; + if (operand_equal_p (exp0, exp1, 0)) + { + *op0 = expand_expr (exp0, target, VOIDmode, modifier); + *op1 = copy_rtx (*op0); + } + else + { + /* If we need to preserve evaluation order, copy exp0 into its own + temporary variable so that it can't be clobbered by exp1. */ + if (flag_evaluation_order && TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (exp1)) + exp0 = save_expr (exp0); + *op0 = expand_expr (exp0, target, VOIDmode, modifier); + *op1 = expand_expr (exp1, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, modifier); + } +} + + +/* Return a MEM that contains constant EXP. DEFER is as for + output_constant_def and MODIFIER is as for expand_expr. */ + +static rtx +expand_expr_constant (tree exp, int defer, enum expand_modifier modifier) +{ + rtx mem; + + mem = output_constant_def (exp, defer); + if (modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER) + mem = use_anchored_address (mem); + return mem; +} + +/* A subroutine of expand_expr_addr_expr. Evaluate the address of EXP. + The TARGET, TMODE and MODIFIER arguments are as for expand_expr. */ + +static rtx +expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (tree exp, rtx target, enum machine_mode tmode, + enum expand_modifier modifier) +{ + rtx result, subtarget; + tree inner, offset; + HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize, bitpos; + int volatilep, unsignedp; + enum machine_mode mode1; + + /* If we are taking the address of a constant and are at the top level, + we have to use output_constant_def since we can't call force_const_mem + at top level. */ + /* ??? This should be considered a front-end bug. We should not be + generating ADDR_EXPR of something that isn't an LVALUE. The only + exception here is STRING_CST. */ + if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR + || CONSTANT_CLASS_P (exp)) + return XEXP (expand_expr_constant (exp, 0, modifier), 0); + + /* Everything must be something allowed by is_gimple_addressable. */ + switch (TREE_CODE (exp)) + { + case INDIRECT_REF: + /* This case will happen via recursion for &a->b. */ + return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, tmode, modifier); + + case CONST_DECL: + /* Recurse and make the output_constant_def clause above handle this. */ + return expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (DECL_INITIAL (exp), target, + tmode, modifier); + + case REALPART_EXPR: + /* The real part of the complex number is always first, therefore + the address is the same as the address of the parent object. */ + offset = 0; + bitpos = 0; + inner = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0); + break; + + case IMAGPART_EXPR: + /* The imaginary part of the complex number is always second. + The expression is therefore always offset by the size of the + scalar type. */ + offset = 0; + bitpos = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp))); + inner = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0); + break; + + default: + /* If the object is a DECL, then expand it for its rtl. Don't bypass + expand_expr, as that can have various side effects; LABEL_DECLs for + example, may not have their DECL_RTL set yet. Assume language + specific tree nodes can be expanded in some interesting way. */ + if (DECL_P (exp) + || TREE_CODE (exp) >= LAST_AND_UNUSED_TREE_CODE) + { + result = expand_expr (exp, target, tmode, + modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER + ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER : EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS); + + /* If the DECL isn't in memory, then the DECL wasn't properly + marked TREE_ADDRESSABLE, which will be either a front-end + or a tree optimizer bug. */ + gcc_assert (MEM_P (result)); + result = XEXP (result, 0); + + /* ??? Is this needed anymore? */ + if (DECL_P (exp) && !TREE_USED (exp) == 0) + { + assemble_external (exp); + TREE_USED (exp) = 1; + } + + if (modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER + && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS) + result = force_operand (result, target); + return result; + } + + /* Pass FALSE as the last argument to get_inner_reference although + we are expanding to RTL. The rationale is that we know how to + handle "aligning nodes" here: we can just bypass them because + they won't change the final object whose address will be returned + (they actually exist only for that purpose). */ + inner = get_inner_reference (exp, &bitsize, &bitpos, &offset, + &mode1, &unsignedp, &volatilep, false); + break; + } + + /* We must have made progress. */ + gcc_assert (inner != exp); + + subtarget = offset || bitpos ? NULL_RTX : target; + result = expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (inner, subtarget, tmode, modifier); + + if (offset) + { + rtx tmp; + + if (modifier != EXPAND_NORMAL) + result = force_operand (result, NULL); + tmp = expand_expr (offset, NULL, tmode, EXPAND_NORMAL); + + result = convert_memory_address (tmode, result); + tmp = convert_memory_address (tmode, tmp); + + if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER) + result = gen_rtx_PLUS (tmode, result, tmp); + else + { + subtarget = bitpos ? NULL_RTX : target; + result = expand_simple_binop (tmode, PLUS, result, tmp, subtarget, + 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN); + } + } + + if (bitpos) + { + /* Someone beforehand should have rejected taking the address + of such an object. */ + gcc_assert ((bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT) == 0); + + result = plus_constant (result, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT); + if (modifier < EXPAND_SUM) + result = force_operand (result, target); + } + + return result; +} + +/* A subroutine of expand_expr. Evaluate EXP, which is an ADDR_EXPR. + The TARGET, TMODE and MODIFIER arguments are as for expand_expr. */ + +static rtx +expand_expr_addr_expr (tree exp, rtx target, enum machine_mode tmode, + enum expand_modifier modifier) +{ + enum machine_mode rmode; + rtx result; + + /* Target mode of VOIDmode says "whatever's natural". */ + if (tmode == VOIDmode) + tmode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)); + + /* We can get called with some Weird Things if the user does silliness + like "(short) &a". In that case, convert_memory_address won't do + the right thing, so ignore the given target mode. */ + if (tmode != Pmode && tmode != ptr_mode) + tmode = Pmode; + + result = expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, + tmode, modifier); + + /* Despite expand_expr claims concerning ignoring TMODE when not + strictly convenient, stuff breaks if we don't honor it. Note + that combined with the above, we only do this for pointer modes. */ + rmode = GET_MODE (result); + if (rmode == VOIDmode) + rmode = tmode; + if (rmode != tmode) + result = convert_memory_address (tmode, result); + + return result; +} + + +/* expand_expr: generate code for computing expression EXP. + An rtx for the computed value is returned. The value is never null. + In the case of a void EXP, const0_rtx is returned. + + The value may be stored in TARGET if TARGET is nonzero. + TARGET is just a suggestion; callers must assume that + the rtx returned may not be the same as TARGET. + + If TARGET is CONST0_RTX, it means that the value will be ignored. + + If TMODE is not VOIDmode, it suggests generating the + result in mode TMODE. But this is done only when convenient. + Otherwise, TMODE is ignored and the value generated in its natural mode. + TMODE is just a suggestion; callers must assume that + the rtx returned may not have mode TMODE. + + Note that TARGET may have neither TMODE nor MODE. In that case, it + probably will not be used. + + If MODIFIER is EXPAND_SUM then when EXP is an addition + we can return an rtx of the form (MULT (REG ...) (CONST_INT ...)) + or a nest of (PLUS ...) and (MINUS ...) where the terms are + products as above, or REG or MEM, or constant. + Ordinarily in such cases we would output mul or add instructions + and then return a pseudo reg containing the sum. + + EXPAND_INITIALIZER is much like EXPAND_SUM except that + it also marks a label as absolutely required (it can't be dead). + It also makes a ZERO_EXTEND or SIGN_EXTEND instead of emitting extend insns. + This is used for outputting expressions used in initializers. + + EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS says that it is okay to return a MEM + with a constant address even if that address is not normally legitimate. + EXPAND_INITIALIZER and EXPAND_SUM also have this effect. + + EXPAND_STACK_PARM is used when expanding to a TARGET on the stack for + a call parameter. Such targets require special care as we haven't yet + marked TARGET so that it's safe from being trashed by libcalls. We + don't want to use TARGET for anything but the final result; + Intermediate values must go elsewhere. Additionally, calls to + emit_block_move will be flagged with BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM. + + If EXP is a VAR_DECL whose DECL_RTL was a MEM with an invalid + address, and ALT_RTL is non-NULL, then *ALT_RTL is set to the + DECL_RTL of the VAR_DECL. *ALT_RTL is also set if EXP is a + COMPOUND_EXPR whose second argument is such a VAR_DECL, and so on + recursively. */ + +static rtx expand_expr_real_1 (tree, rtx, enum machine_mode, + enum expand_modifier, rtx *); + +rtx +expand_expr_real (tree exp, rtx target, enum machine_mode tmode, + enum expand_modifier modifier, rtx *alt_rtl) +{ + int rn = -1; + rtx ret, last = NULL; + + /* Handle ERROR_MARK before anybody tries to access its type. */ + if (TREE_CODE (exp) == ERROR_MARK + || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == ERROR_MARK) + { + ret = CONST0_RTX (tmode); + return ret ? ret : const0_rtx; + } + + if (flag_non_call_exceptions) + { + rn = lookup_stmt_eh_region (exp); + /* If rn < 0, then either (1) tree-ssa not used or (2) doesn't throw. */ + if (rn >= 0) + last = get_last_insn (); + } + + /* If this is an expression of some kind and it has an associated line + number, then emit the line number before expanding the expression. + + We need to save and restore the file and line information so that + errors discovered during expansion are emitted with the right + information. It would be better of the diagnostic routines + used the file/line information embedded in the tree nodes rather + than globals. */ + if (cfun && cfun->ib_boundaries_block && EXPR_HAS_LOCATION (exp)) + { + location_t saved_location = input_location; + input_location = EXPR_LOCATION (exp); + emit_line_note (input_location); + + /* Record where the insns produced belong. */ + record_block_change (TREE_BLOCK (exp)); + + ret = expand_expr_real_1 (exp, target, tmode, modifier, alt_rtl); + + input_location = saved_location; + } + else + { + ret = expand_expr_real_1 (exp, target, tmode, modifier, alt_rtl); + } + + /* If using non-call exceptions, mark all insns that may trap. + expand_call() will mark CALL_INSNs before we get to this code, + but it doesn't handle libcalls, and these may trap. */ + if (rn >= 0) + { + rtx insn; + for (insn = next_real_insn (last); insn; + insn = next_real_insn (insn)) + { + if (! find_reg_note (insn, REG_EH_REGION, NULL_RTX) + /* If we want exceptions for non-call insns, any + may_trap_p instruction may throw. */ + && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) != CLOBBER + && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) != USE + && (CALL_P (insn) || may_trap_p (PATTERN (insn)))) + { + REG_NOTES (insn) = alloc_EXPR_LIST (REG_EH_REGION, GEN_INT (rn), + REG_NOTES (insn)); + } + } + } + + return ret; +} + +static rtx +expand_expr_real_1 (tree exp, rtx target, enum machine_mode tmode, + enum expand_modifier modifier, rtx *alt_rtl) +{ + rtx op0, op1, temp, decl_rtl; + tree type = TREE_TYPE (exp); + int unsignedp; + enum machine_mode mode; + enum tree_code code = TREE_CODE (exp); + optab this_optab; + rtx subtarget, original_target; + int ignore; + tree context, subexp0, subexp1; + bool reduce_bit_field = false; +#define REDUCE_BIT_FIELD(expr) (reduce_bit_field && !ignore \ + ? reduce_to_bit_field_precision ((expr), \ + target, \ + type) \ + : (expr)) + + mode = TYPE_MODE (type); + unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (type); + if (lang_hooks.reduce_bit_field_operations + && TREE_CODE (type) == INTEGER_TYPE + && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) > TYPE_PRECISION (type)) + { + /* An operation in what may be a bit-field type needs the + result to be reduced to the precision of the bit-field type, + which is narrower than that of the type's mode. */ + reduce_bit_field = true; + if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM) + target = 0; + } + + /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */ + subtarget = get_subtarget (target); + original_target = target; + ignore = (target == const0_rtx + || ((code == NON_LVALUE_EXPR || code == NOP_EXPR + || code == CONVERT_EXPR || code == COND_EXPR + || code == VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR) + && TREE_CODE (type) == VOID_TYPE)); + + /* If we are going to ignore this result, we need only do something + if there is a side-effect somewhere in the expression. If there + is, short-circuit the most common cases here. Note that we must + not call expand_expr with anything but const0_rtx in case this + is an initial expansion of a size that contains a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR. */ + + if (ignore) + { + if (! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (exp)) + return const0_rtx; + + /* Ensure we reference a volatile object even if value is ignored, but + don't do this if all we are doing is taking its address. */ + if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp) + && TREE_CODE (exp) != FUNCTION_DECL + && mode != VOIDmode && mode != BLKmode + && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS) + { + temp = expand_expr (exp, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, modifier); + if (MEM_P (temp)) + temp = copy_to_reg (temp); + return const0_rtx; + } + + if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == tcc_unary + || code == COMPONENT_REF || code == INDIRECT_REF) + return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, + modifier); + + else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == tcc_binary + || TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == tcc_comparison + || code == ARRAY_REF || code == ARRAY_RANGE_REF) + { + expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier); + expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier); + return const0_rtx; + } + else if (code == BIT_FIELD_REF) + { + expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier); + expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier); + expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier); + return const0_rtx; + } + + target = 0; + } + + + switch (code) + { + case LABEL_DECL: + { + tree function = decl_function_context (exp); + + temp = label_rtx (exp); + temp = gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode, temp); + + if (function != current_function_decl + && function != 0) + LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (temp) = 1; + + temp = gen_rtx_MEM (FUNCTION_MODE, temp); + return temp; + } + + case SSA_NAME: + return expand_expr_real_1 (SSA_NAME_VAR (exp), target, tmode, modifier, + NULL); + + case PARM_DECL: + case VAR_DECL: + /* If a static var's type was incomplete when the decl was written, + but the type is complete now, lay out the decl now. */ + if (DECL_SIZE (exp) == 0 + && COMPLETE_OR_UNBOUND_ARRAY_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp)) + && (TREE_STATIC (exp) || DECL_EXTERNAL (exp))) + layout_decl (exp, 0); + + /* ... fall through ... */ + + case FUNCTION_DECL: + case RESULT_DECL: + decl_rtl = DECL_RTL (exp); + gcc_assert (decl_rtl); + + /* Ensure variable marked as used even if it doesn't go through + a parser. If it hasn't be used yet, write out an external + definition. */ + if (! TREE_USED (exp)) + { + assemble_external (exp); + TREE_USED (exp) = 1; + } + + /* Show we haven't gotten RTL for this yet. */ + temp = 0; + + /* Variables inherited from containing functions should have + been lowered by this point. */ + context = decl_function_context (exp); + gcc_assert (!context + || context == current_function_decl + || TREE_STATIC (exp) + /* ??? C++ creates functions that are not TREE_STATIC. */ + || TREE_CODE (exp) == FUNCTION_DECL); + + /* This is the case of an array whose size is to be determined + from its initializer, while the initializer is still being parsed. + See expand_decl. */ + + if (MEM_P (decl_rtl) && REG_P (XEXP (decl_rtl, 0))) + temp = validize_mem (decl_rtl); + + /* If DECL_RTL is memory, we are in the normal case and either + the address is not valid or it is not a register and -fforce-addr + is specified, get the address into a register. */ + + else if (MEM_P (decl_rtl) && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER) + { + if (alt_rtl) + *alt_rtl = decl_rtl; + decl_rtl = use_anchored_address (decl_rtl); + if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS + && modifier != EXPAND_SUM + && (!memory_address_p (DECL_MODE (exp), XEXP (decl_rtl, 0)) + || (flag_force_addr && !REG_P (XEXP (decl_rtl, 0))))) + temp = replace_equiv_address (decl_rtl, + copy_rtx (XEXP (decl_rtl, 0))); + } + + /* If we got something, return it. But first, set the alignment + if the address is a register. */ + if (temp != 0) + { + if (MEM_P (temp) && REG_P (XEXP (temp, 0))) + mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (temp, 0), DECL_ALIGN (exp)); + + return temp; + } + + /* If the mode of DECL_RTL does not match that of the decl, it + must be a promoted value. We return a SUBREG of the wanted mode, + but mark it so that we know that it was already extended. */ + + if (REG_P (decl_rtl) + && GET_MODE (decl_rtl) != DECL_MODE (exp)) + { + enum machine_mode pmode; + + /* Get the signedness used for this variable. Ensure we get the + same mode we got when the variable was declared. */ + pmode = promote_mode (type, DECL_MODE (exp), &unsignedp, + (TREE_CODE (exp) == RESULT_DECL + || TREE_CODE (exp) == PARM_DECL) ? 1 : 0); + gcc_assert (GET_MODE (decl_rtl) == pmode); + + temp = gen_lowpart_SUBREG (mode, decl_rtl); + SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (temp) = 1; + SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_SET (temp, unsignedp); + return temp; + } + + return decl_rtl; + + case INTEGER_CST: + temp = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp), + TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (exp), mode); + + /* ??? If overflow is set, fold will have done an incomplete job, + which can result in (plus xx (const_int 0)), which can get + simplified by validate_replace_rtx during virtual register + instantiation, which can result in unrecognizable insns. + Avoid this by forcing all overflows into registers. */ + if (TREE_CONSTANT_OVERFLOW (exp) + && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER) + temp = force_reg (mode, temp); + + return temp; + + case VECTOR_CST: + { + tree tmp = NULL_TREE; + if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_VECTOR_INT + || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_VECTOR_FLOAT) + return const_vector_from_tree (exp); + if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT) + { + tree type_for_mode = lang_hooks.types.type_for_mode (mode, 1); + if (type_for_mode) + tmp = fold_unary (VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR, type_for_mode, exp); + } + if (!tmp) + tmp = build_constructor_from_list (type, + TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (exp)); + return expand_expr (tmp, ignore ? const0_rtx : target, + tmode, modifier); + } + + case CONST_DECL: + return expand_expr (DECL_INITIAL (exp), target, VOIDmode, modifier); + + case REAL_CST: + /* If optimized, generate immediate CONST_DOUBLE + which will be turned into memory by reload if necessary. + + We used to force a register so that loop.c could see it. But + this does not allow gen_* patterns to perform optimizations with + the constants. It also produces two insns in cases like "x = 1.0;". + On most machines, floating-point constants are not permitted in + many insns, so we'd end up copying it to a register in any case. + + Now, we do the copying in expand_binop, if appropriate. */ + return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (TREE_REAL_CST (exp), + TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp))); + + case COMPLEX_CST: + /* Handle evaluating a complex constant in a CONCAT target. */ + if (original_target && GET_CODE (original_target) == CONCAT) + { + enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp))); + rtx rtarg, itarg; + + rtarg = XEXP (original_target, 0); + itarg = XEXP (original_target, 1); + + /* Move the real and imaginary parts separately. */ + op0 = expand_expr (TREE_REALPART (exp), rtarg, mode, 0); + op1 = expand_expr (TREE_IMAGPART (exp), itarg, mode, 0); + + if (op0 != rtarg) + emit_move_insn (rtarg, op0); + if (op1 != itarg) + emit_move_insn (itarg, op1); + + return original_target; + } + + /* ... fall through ... */ + + case STRING_CST: + temp = expand_expr_constant (exp, 1, modifier); + + /* temp contains a constant address. + On RISC machines where a constant address isn't valid, + make some insns to get that address into a register. */ + if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS + && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER + && modifier != EXPAND_SUM + && (! memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (temp, 0)) + || flag_force_addr)) + return replace_equiv_address (temp, + copy_rtx (XEXP (temp, 0))); + return temp; + + case SAVE_EXPR: + { + tree val = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0); + rtx ret = expand_expr_real_1 (val, target, tmode, modifier, alt_rtl); + + if (!SAVE_EXPR_RESOLVED_P (exp)) + { + /* We can indeed still hit this case, typically via builtin + expanders calling save_expr immediately before expanding + something. Assume this means that we only have to deal + with non-BLKmode values. */ + gcc_assert (GET_MODE (ret) != BLKmode); + + val = build_decl (VAR_DECL, NULL, TREE_TYPE (exp)); + DECL_ARTIFICIAL (val) = 1; + DECL_IGNORED_P (val) = 1; + TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0) = val; + SAVE_EXPR_RESOLVED_P (exp) = 1; + + if (!CONSTANT_P (ret)) + ret = copy_to_reg (ret); + SET_DECL_RTL (val, ret); + } + + return ret; + } + + case GOTO_EXPR: + if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == LABEL_DECL) + expand_goto (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + else + expand_computed_goto (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + return const0_rtx; + + case CONSTRUCTOR: + /* If we don't need the result, just ensure we evaluate any + subexpressions. */ + if (ignore) + { + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx; + tree value; + + FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_VALUE (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, value) + expand_expr (value, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0); + + return const0_rtx; + } + + /* Try to avoid creating a temporary at all. This is possible + if all of the initializer is zero. + FIXME: try to handle all [0..255] initializers we can handle + with memset. */ + else if (TREE_STATIC (exp) + && !TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp) + && target != 0 && mode == BLKmode + && all_zeros_p (exp)) + { + clear_storage (target, expr_size (exp), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL); + return target; + } + + /* All elts simple constants => refer to a constant in memory. But + if this is a non-BLKmode mode, let it store a field at a time + since that should make a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE when we + fold. Likewise, if we have a target we can use, it is best to + store directly into the target unless the type is large enough + that memcpy will be used. If we are making an initializer and + all operands are constant, put it in memory as well. + + FIXME: Avoid trying to fill vector constructors piece-meal. + Output them with output_constant_def below unless we're sure + they're zeros. This should go away when vector initializers + are treated like VECTOR_CST instead of arrays. + */ + else if ((TREE_STATIC (exp) + && ((mode == BLKmode + && ! (target != 0 && safe_from_p (target, exp, 1))) + || TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp) + || (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (type), 1) + && (! MOVE_BY_PIECES_P + (tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (type), 1), + TYPE_ALIGN (type))) + && ! mostly_zeros_p (exp)))) + || ((modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER + || modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS) + && TREE_CONSTANT (exp))) + { + rtx constructor = expand_expr_constant (exp, 1, modifier); + + if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS + && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER + && modifier != EXPAND_SUM) + constructor = validize_mem (constructor); + + return constructor; + } + else + { + /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple non-contiguous + locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */ + if (target == 0 || ! safe_from_p (target, exp, 1) + || GET_CODE (target) == PARALLEL + || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM) + target + = assign_temp (build_qualified_type (type, + (TYPE_QUALS (type) + | (TREE_READONLY (exp) + * TYPE_QUAL_CONST))), + 0, TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp), 1); + + store_constructor (exp, target, 0, int_expr_size (exp)); + return target; + } + + case MISALIGNED_INDIRECT_REF: + case ALIGN_INDIRECT_REF: + case INDIRECT_REF: + { + tree exp1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0); + + if (modifier != EXPAND_WRITE) + { + tree t; + + t = fold_read_from_constant_string (exp); + if (t) + return expand_expr (t, target, tmode, modifier); + } + + op0 = expand_expr (exp1, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM); + op0 = memory_address (mode, op0); + + if (code == ALIGN_INDIRECT_REF) + { + int align = TYPE_ALIGN_UNIT (type); + op0 = gen_rtx_AND (Pmode, op0, GEN_INT (-align)); + op0 = memory_address (mode, op0); + } + + temp = gen_rtx_MEM (mode, op0); + + set_mem_attributes (temp, exp, 0); + + /* Resolve the misalignment now, so that we don't have to remember + to resolve it later. Of course, this only works for reads. */ + /* ??? When we get around to supporting writes, we'll have to handle + this in store_expr directly. The vectorizer isn't generating + those yet, however. */ + if (code == MISALIGNED_INDIRECT_REF) + { + int icode; + rtx reg, insn; + + gcc_assert (modifier == EXPAND_NORMAL + || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM); + + /* The vectorizer should have already checked the mode. */ + icode = movmisalign_optab->handlers[mode].insn_code; + gcc_assert (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing); + + /* We've already validated the memory, and we're creating a + new pseudo destination. The predicates really can't fail. */ + reg = gen_reg_rtx (mode); + + /* Nor can the insn generator. */ + insn = GEN_FCN (icode) (reg, temp); + emit_insn (insn); + + return reg; + } + + return temp; + } + + case TARGET_MEM_REF: + { + struct mem_address addr; + + get_address_description (exp, &addr); + op0 = addr_for_mem_ref (&addr, true); + op0 = memory_address (mode, op0); + temp = gen_rtx_MEM (mode, op0); + set_mem_attributes (temp, TMR_ORIGINAL (exp), 0); + } + return temp; + + case ARRAY_REF: + + { + tree array = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0); + tree index = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1); + + /* Fold an expression like: "foo"[2]. + This is not done in fold so it won't happen inside &. + Don't fold if this is for wide characters since it's too + difficult to do correctly and this is a very rare case. */ + + if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS + && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER + && modifier != EXPAND_MEMORY) + { + tree t = fold_read_from_constant_string (exp); + + if (t) + return expand_expr (t, target, tmode, modifier); + } + + /* If this is a constant index into a constant array, + just get the value from the array. Handle both the cases when + we have an explicit constructor and when our operand is a variable + that was declared const. */ + + if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS + && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER + && modifier != EXPAND_MEMORY + && TREE_CODE (array) == CONSTRUCTOR + && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array) + && TREE_CODE (index) == INTEGER_CST) + { + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ix; + tree field, value; + + FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (array), ix, + field, value) + if (tree_int_cst_equal (field, index)) + { + if (!TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (value)) + return expand_expr (fold (value), target, tmode, modifier); + break; + } + } + + else if (optimize >= 1 + && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS + && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER + && modifier != EXPAND_MEMORY + && TREE_READONLY (array) && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array) + && TREE_CODE (array) == VAR_DECL && DECL_INITIAL (array) + && TREE_CODE (DECL_INITIAL (array)) != ERROR_MARK + && targetm.binds_local_p (array)) + { + if (TREE_CODE (index) == INTEGER_CST) + { + tree init = DECL_INITIAL (array); + + if (TREE_CODE (init) == CONSTRUCTOR) + { + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ix; + tree field, value; + + FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (init), ix, + field, value) + if (tree_int_cst_equal (field, index)) + { + if (!TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (value)) + return expand_expr (fold (value), target, tmode, + modifier); + break; + } + } + else if(TREE_CODE (init) == STRING_CST) + { + tree index1 = index; + tree low_bound = array_ref_low_bound (exp); + index1 = fold_convert (sizetype, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)); + + /* Optimize the special-case of a zero lower bound. + + We convert the low_bound to sizetype to avoid some problems + with constant folding. (E.g. suppose the lower bound is 1, + and its mode is QI. Without the conversion,l (ARRAY + +(INDEX-(unsigned char)1)) becomes ((ARRAY+(-(unsigned char)1)) + +INDEX), which becomes (ARRAY+255+INDEX). Opps!) */ + + if (! integer_zerop (low_bound)) + index1 = size_diffop (index1, fold_convert (sizetype, + low_bound)); + + if (0 > compare_tree_int (index1, + TREE_STRING_LENGTH (init))) + { + tree type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (init)); + enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (type); + + if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT + && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == 1) + return gen_int_mode (TREE_STRING_POINTER (init) + [TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index1)], + mode); + } + } + } + } + } + goto normal_inner_ref; + + case COMPONENT_REF: + /* If the operand is a CONSTRUCTOR, we can just extract the + appropriate field if it is present. */ + if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == CONSTRUCTOR) + { + unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx; + tree field, value; + + FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)), + idx, field, value) + if (field == TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) + /* We can normally use the value of the field in the + CONSTRUCTOR. However, if this is a bitfield in + an integral mode that we can fit in a HOST_WIDE_INT, + we must mask only the number of bits in the bitfield, + since this is done implicitly by the constructor. If + the bitfield does not meet either of those conditions, + we can't do this optimization. */ + && (! DECL_BIT_FIELD (field) + || ((GET_MODE_CLASS (DECL_MODE (field)) == MODE_INT) + && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (DECL_MODE (field)) + <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)))) + { + if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field) + && modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM) + target = 0; + op0 = expand_expr (value, target, tmode, modifier); + if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field)) + { + HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (field)); + enum machine_mode imode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (field)); + + if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (field))) + { + op1 = GEN_INT (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << bitsize) - 1); + op0 = expand_and (imode, op0, op1, target); + } + else + { + tree count + = build_int_cst (NULL_TREE, + GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode) - bitsize); + + op0 = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, imode, op0, count, + target, 0); + op0 = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, imode, op0, count, + target, 0); + } + } + + return op0; + } + } + goto normal_inner_ref; + + case BIT_FIELD_REF: + case ARRAY_RANGE_REF: + normal_inner_ref: + { + enum machine_mode mode1; + HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize, bitpos; + tree offset; + int volatilep = 0; + tree tem = get_inner_reference (exp, &bitsize, &bitpos, &offset, + &mode1, &unsignedp, &volatilep, true); + rtx orig_op0; + + /* If we got back the original object, something is wrong. Perhaps + we are evaluating an expression too early. In any event, don't + infinitely recurse. */ + gcc_assert (tem != exp); + + /* If TEM's type is a union of variable size, pass TARGET to the inner + computation, since it will need a temporary and TARGET is known + to have to do. This occurs in unchecked conversion in Ada. */ + + orig_op0 = op0 + = expand_expr (tem, + (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (tem)) == UNION_TYPE + && (TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (tem))) + != INTEGER_CST) + && modifier != EXPAND_STACK_PARM + ? target : NULL_RTX), + VOIDmode, + (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER + || modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS + || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM) + ? modifier : EXPAND_NORMAL); + + /* If this is a constant, put it into a register if it is a legitimate + constant, OFFSET is 0, and we won't try to extract outside the + register (in case we were passed a partially uninitialized object + or a view_conversion to a larger size). Force the constant to + memory otherwise. */ + if (CONSTANT_P (op0)) + { + enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (tem)); + if (mode != BLKmode && LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (op0) + && offset == 0 + && bitpos + bitsize <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode)) + op0 = force_reg (mode, op0); + else + op0 = validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode, op0)); + } + + /* Otherwise, if this object not in memory and we either have an + offset, a BLKmode result, or a reference outside the object, put it + there. Such cases can occur in Ada if we have unchecked conversion + of an expression from a scalar type to an array or record type or + for an ARRAY_RANGE_REF whose type is BLKmode. */ + else if (!MEM_P (op0) + && (offset != 0 + || (bitpos + bitsize > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0))) + || (code == ARRAY_RANGE_REF && mode == BLKmode))) + { + tree nt = build_qualified_type (TREE_TYPE (tem), + (TYPE_QUALS (TREE_TYPE (tem)) + | TYPE_QUAL_CONST)); + rtx memloc = assign_temp (nt, 1, 1, 1); + + emit_move_insn (memloc, op0); + op0 = memloc; + } + + if (offset != 0) + { + rtx offset_rtx = expand_expr (offset, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, + EXPAND_SUM); + + gcc_assert (MEM_P (op0)); + +#ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED + if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != Pmode) + offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (Pmode, offset_rtx, 0); +#else + if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != ptr_mode) + offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (ptr_mode, offset_rtx, 0); +#endif + + if (GET_MODE (op0) == BLKmode + /* A constant address in OP0 can have VOIDmode, we must + not try to call force_reg in that case. */ + && GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) != VOIDmode + && bitsize != 0 + && (bitpos % bitsize) == 0 + && (bitsize % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1)) == 0 + && MEM_ALIGN (op0) == GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1)) + { + op0 = adjust_address (op0, mode1, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT); + bitpos = 0; + } + + op0 = offset_address (op0, offset_rtx, + highest_pow2_factor (offset)); + } + + /* If OFFSET is making OP0 more aligned than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT, + record its alignment as BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */ + if (MEM_P (op0) && bitpos == 0 && offset != 0 + && is_aligning_offset (offset, tem)) + set_mem_align (op0, BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT); + + /* Don't forget about volatility even if this is a bitfield. */ + if (MEM_P (op0) && volatilep && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0)) + { + if (op0 == orig_op0) + op0 = copy_rtx (op0); + + MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0) = 1; + } + + /* The following code doesn't handle CONCAT. + Assume only bitpos == 0 can be used for CONCAT, due to + one element arrays having the same mode as its element. */ + if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONCAT) + { + gcc_assert (bitpos == 0 + && bitsize == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0))); + return op0; + } + + /* In cases where an aligned union has an unaligned object + as a field, we might be extracting a BLKmode value from + an integer-mode (e.g., SImode) object. Handle this case + by doing the extract into an object as wide as the field + (which we know to be the width of a basic mode), then + storing into memory, and changing the mode to BLKmode. */ + if (mode1 == VOIDmode + || REG_P (op0) || GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG + || (mode1 != BLKmode && ! direct_load[(int) mode1] + && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT + && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT + && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS + && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER) + /* If the field isn't aligned enough to fetch as a memref, + fetch it as a bit field. */ + || (mode1 != BLKmode + && (((TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (tem)) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) + || (bitpos % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) != 0) + || (MEM_P (op0) + && (MEM_ALIGN (op0) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1) + || (bitpos % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1) != 0)))) + && ((modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS + || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER) + ? STRICT_ALIGNMENT + : SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode1, MEM_ALIGN (op0)))) + || (bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT != 0))) + /* If the type and the field are a constant size and the + size of the type isn't the same size as the bitfield, + we must use bitfield operations. */ + || (bitsize >= 0 + && TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) + && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))) == INTEGER_CST + && 0 != compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)), + bitsize))) + { + enum machine_mode ext_mode = mode; + + if (ext_mode == BLKmode + && ! (target != 0 && MEM_P (op0) + && MEM_P (target) + && bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT == 0)) + ext_mode = mode_for_size (bitsize, MODE_INT, 1); + + if (ext_mode == BLKmode) + { + if (target == 0) + target = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 1); + + if (bitsize == 0) + return target; + + /* In this case, BITPOS must start at a byte boundary and + TARGET, if specified, must be a MEM. */ + gcc_assert (MEM_P (op0) + && (!target || MEM_P (target)) + && !(bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT)); + + emit_block_move (target, + adjust_address (op0, VOIDmode, + bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT), + GEN_INT ((bitsize + BITS_PER_UNIT - 1) + / BITS_PER_UNIT), + (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM + ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL)); + + return target; + } + + op0 = validize_mem (op0); + + if (MEM_P (op0) && REG_P (XEXP (op0, 0))) + mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0)); + + op0 = extract_bit_field (op0, bitsize, bitpos, unsignedp, + (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM + ? NULL_RTX : target), + ext_mode, ext_mode); + + /* If the result is a record type and BITSIZE is narrower than + the mode of OP0, an integral mode, and this is a big endian + machine, we must put the field into the high-order bits. */ + if (TREE_CODE (type) == RECORD_TYPE && BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN + && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_INT + && bitsize < (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0))) + op0 = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (op0), op0, + size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0)) + - bitsize), + op0, 1); + + /* If the result type is BLKmode, store the data into a temporary + of the appropriate type, but with the mode corresponding to the + mode for the data we have (op0's mode). It's tempting to make + this a constant type, since we know it's only being stored once, + but that can cause problems if we are taking the address of this + COMPONENT_REF because the MEM of any reference via that address + will have flags corresponding to the type, which will not + necessarily be constant. */ + if (mode == BLKmode) + { + rtx new + = assign_stack_temp_for_type + (ext_mode, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (ext_mode), 0, type); + + emit_move_insn (new, op0); + op0 = copy_rtx (new); + PUT_MODE (op0, BLKmode); + set_mem_attributes (op0, exp, 1); + } + + return op0; + } + + /* If the result is BLKmode, use that to access the object + now as well. */ + if (mode == BLKmode) + mode1 = BLKmode; + + /* Get a reference to just this component. */ + if (modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS + || modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER) + op0 = adjust_address_nv (op0, mode1, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT); + else + op0 = adjust_address (op0, mode1, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT); + + if (op0 == orig_op0) + op0 = copy_rtx (op0); + + set_mem_attributes (op0, exp, 0); + if (REG_P (XEXP (op0, 0))) + mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0)); + + MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0) |= volatilep; + if (mode == mode1 || mode1 == BLKmode || mode1 == tmode + || modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS + || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER) + return op0; + else if (target == 0) + target = gen_reg_rtx (tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode); + + convert_move (target, op0, unsignedp); + return target; + } + + case OBJ_TYPE_REF: + return expand_expr (OBJ_TYPE_REF_EXPR (exp), target, tmode, modifier); + + case CALL_EXPR: + /* Check for a built-in function. */ + if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == ADDR_EXPR + && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)) + == FUNCTION_DECL) + && DECL_BUILT_IN (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0))) + { + if (DECL_BUILT_IN_CLASS (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)) + == BUILT_IN_FRONTEND) + return lang_hooks.expand_expr (exp, original_target, + tmode, modifier, + alt_rtl); + else + return expand_builtin (exp, target, subtarget, tmode, ignore); + } + + return expand_call (exp, target, ignore); + + case NON_LVALUE_EXPR: + case NOP_EXPR: + case CONVERT_EXPR: + if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0) == error_mark_node) + return const0_rtx; + + if (TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE) + { + tree valtype = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + + /* If both input and output are BLKmode, this conversion isn't doing + anything except possibly changing memory attribute. */ + if (mode == BLKmode && TYPE_MODE (valtype) == BLKmode) + { + rtx result = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, tmode, + modifier); + + result = copy_rtx (result); + set_mem_attributes (result, exp, 0); + return result; + } + + if (target == 0) + { + if (TYPE_MODE (type) != BLKmode) + target = gen_reg_rtx (TYPE_MODE (type)); + else + target = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 1); + } + + if (MEM_P (target)) + /* Store data into beginning of memory target. */ + store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), + adjust_address (target, TYPE_MODE (valtype), 0), + modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM); + + else + { + gcc_assert (REG_P (target)); + + /* Store this field into a union of the proper type. */ + store_field (target, + MIN ((int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE + (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) + * BITS_PER_UNIT), + (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode)), + 0, TYPE_MODE (valtype), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), + type, 0); + } + + /* Return the entire union. */ + return target; + } + + if (mode == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))) + { + op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, VOIDmode, + modifier); + + /* If the signedness of the conversion differs and OP0 is + a promoted SUBREG, clear that indication since we now + have to do the proper extension. */ + if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) != unsignedp + && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG) + SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (op0) = 0; + + return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0); + } + + op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), NULL_RTX, mode, + modifier == EXPAND_SUM ? EXPAND_NORMAL : modifier); + if (GET_MODE (op0) == mode) + ; + + /* If OP0 is a constant, just convert it into the proper mode. */ + else if (CONSTANT_P (op0)) + { + tree inner_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + enum machine_mode inner_mode = TYPE_MODE (inner_type); + + if (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER) + op0 = simplify_gen_subreg (mode, op0, inner_mode, + subreg_lowpart_offset (mode, + inner_mode)); + else + op0= convert_modes (mode, inner_mode, op0, + TYPE_UNSIGNED (inner_type)); + } + + else if (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER) + op0 = gen_rtx_fmt_e (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND, mode, op0); + + else if (target == 0) + op0 = convert_to_mode (mode, op0, + TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE + (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))); + else + { + convert_move (target, op0, + TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))); + op0 = target; + } + + return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0); + + case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR: + op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), NULL_RTX, mode, modifier); + + /* If the input and output modes are both the same, we are done. */ + if (TYPE_MODE (type) == GET_MODE (op0)) + ; + /* If neither mode is BLKmode, and both modes are the same size + then we can use gen_lowpart. */ + else if (TYPE_MODE (type) != BLKmode && GET_MODE (op0) != BLKmode + && GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (type)) + == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op0))) + { + if (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG) + op0 = force_reg (GET_MODE (op0), op0); + op0 = gen_lowpart (TYPE_MODE (type), op0); + } + /* If both modes are integral, then we can convert from one to the + other. */ + else if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0)) + && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (TYPE_MODE (type))) + op0 = convert_modes (TYPE_MODE (type), GET_MODE (op0), op0, + TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))); + /* As a last resort, spill op0 to memory, and reload it in a + different mode. */ + else if (!MEM_P (op0)) + { + /* If the operand is not a MEM, force it into memory. Since we + are going to be changing the mode of the MEM, don't call + force_const_mem for constants because we don't allow pool + constants to change mode. */ + tree inner_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + + gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp)); + + if (target == 0 || GET_MODE (target) != TYPE_MODE (inner_type)) + target + = assign_stack_temp_for_type + (TYPE_MODE (inner_type), + GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (inner_type)), 0, inner_type); + + emit_move_insn (target, op0); + op0 = target; + } + + /* At this point, OP0 is in the correct mode. If the output type is such + that the operand is known to be aligned, indicate that it is. + Otherwise, we need only be concerned about alignment for non-BLKmode + results. */ + if (MEM_P (op0)) + { + op0 = copy_rtx (op0); + + if (TYPE_ALIGN_OK (type)) + set_mem_align (op0, MAX (MEM_ALIGN (op0), TYPE_ALIGN (type))); + else if (TYPE_MODE (type) != BLKmode && STRICT_ALIGNMENT + && MEM_ALIGN (op0) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (TYPE_MODE (type))) + { + tree inner_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + HOST_WIDE_INT temp_size + = MAX (int_size_in_bytes (inner_type), + (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (type))); + rtx new = assign_stack_temp_for_type (TYPE_MODE (type), + temp_size, 0, type); + rtx new_with_op0_mode = adjust_address (new, GET_MODE (op0), 0); + + gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp)); + + if (GET_MODE (op0) == BLKmode) + emit_block_move (new_with_op0_mode, op0, + GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (type))), + (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM + ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL)); + else + emit_move_insn (new_with_op0_mode, op0); + + op0 = new; + } + + op0 = adjust_address (op0, TYPE_MODE (type), 0); + } + + return op0; + + case PLUS_EXPR: + /* If we are adding a constant, a VAR_DECL that is sp, fp, or ap, and + something else, make sure we add the register to the constant and + then to the other thing. This case can occur during strength + reduction and doing it this way will produce better code if the + frame pointer or argument pointer is eliminated. + + fold-const.c will ensure that the constant is always in the inner + PLUS_EXPR, so the only case we need to do anything about is if + sp, ap, or fp is our second argument, in which case we must swap + the innermost first argument and our second argument. */ + + if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == PLUS_EXPR + && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1)) == INTEGER_CST + && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == VAR_DECL + && (DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == frame_pointer_rtx + || DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == stack_pointer_rtx + || DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == arg_pointer_rtx)) + { + tree t = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1); + + TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0); + TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0) = t; + } + + /* If the result is to be ptr_mode and we are adding an integer to + something, we might be forming a constant. So try to use + plus_constant. If it produces a sum and we can't accept it, + use force_operand. This allows P = &ARR[const] to generate + efficient code on machines where a SYMBOL_REF is not a valid + address. + + If this is an EXPAND_SUM call, always return the sum. */ + if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER + || (mode == ptr_mode && (unsignedp || ! flag_trapv))) + { + if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM) + target = 0; + if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == INTEGER_CST + && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT + && TREE_CONSTANT (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) + { + rtx constant_part; + + op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), subtarget, VOIDmode, + EXPAND_SUM); + /* Use immed_double_const to ensure that the constant is + truncated according to the mode of OP1, then sign extended + to a HOST_WIDE_INT. Using the constant directly can result + in non-canonical RTL in a 64x32 cross compile. */ + constant_part + = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)), + (HOST_WIDE_INT) 0, + TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))); + op1 = plus_constant (op1, INTVAL (constant_part)); + if (modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER) + op1 = force_operand (op1, target); + return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op1); + } + + else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST + && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT + && TREE_CONSTANT (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) + { + rtx constant_part; + + op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, + (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER + ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER : EXPAND_SUM)); + if (! CONSTANT_P (op0)) + { + op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), NULL_RTX, + VOIDmode, modifier); + /* Return a PLUS if modifier says it's OK. */ + if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM + || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER) + return simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, op0, op1); + goto binop2; + } + /* Use immed_double_const to ensure that the constant is + truncated according to the mode of OP1, then sign extended + to a HOST_WIDE_INT. Using the constant directly can result + in non-canonical RTL in a 64x32 cross compile. */ + constant_part + = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)), + (HOST_WIDE_INT) 0, + TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))); + op0 = plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (constant_part)); + if (modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER) + op0 = force_operand (op0, target); + return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0); + } + } + + /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done + if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address. + And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or + zero-extend. */ + if ((modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER) + || mode != ptr_mode) + { + expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), + subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0); + if (op0 == const0_rtx) + return op1; + if (op1 == const0_rtx) + return op0; + goto binop2; + } + + expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), + subtarget, &op0, &op1, modifier); + return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, op0, op1)); + + case MINUS_EXPR: + /* For initializers, we are allowed to return a MINUS of two + symbolic constants. Here we handle all cases when both operands + are constant. */ + /* Handle difference of two symbolic constants, + for the sake of an initializer. */ + if ((modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER) + && really_constant_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) + && really_constant_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) + { + expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), + NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, modifier); + + /* If the last operand is a CONST_INT, use plus_constant of + the negated constant. Else make the MINUS. */ + if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT) + return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (plus_constant (op0, - INTVAL (op1))); + else + return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (gen_rtx_MINUS (mode, op0, op1)); + } + + /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done + if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address. + And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or + zero-extend. */ + if ((modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER) + || mode != ptr_mode) + goto binop; + + expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), + subtarget, &op0, &op1, modifier); + + /* Convert A - const to A + (-const). */ + if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT) + { + op1 = negate_rtx (mode, op1); + return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, op0, op1)); + } + + goto binop2; + + case MULT_EXPR: + /* If first operand is constant, swap them. + Thus the following special case checks need only + check the second operand. */ + if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == INTEGER_CST) + { + tree t1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0); + TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0) = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1); + TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) = t1; + } + + /* Attempt to return something suitable for generating an + indexed address, for machines that support that. */ + + if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM && mode == ptr_mode + && host_integerp (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0)) + { + tree exp1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1); + + op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, + EXPAND_SUM); + + if (!REG_P (op0)) + op0 = force_operand (op0, NULL_RTX); + if (!REG_P (op0)) + op0 = copy_to_mode_reg (mode, op0); + + return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (gen_rtx_MULT (mode, op0, + gen_int_mode (tree_low_cst (exp1, 0), + TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp1))))); + } + + if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM) + target = 0; + + /* Check for multiplying things that have been extended + from a narrower type. If this machine supports multiplying + in that narrower type with a result in the desired type, + do it that way, and avoid the explicit type-conversion. */ + + subexp0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0); + subexp1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1); + /* First, check if we have a multiplication of one signed and one + unsigned operand. */ + if (TREE_CODE (subexp0) == NOP_EXPR + && TREE_CODE (subexp1) == NOP_EXPR + && TREE_CODE (type) == INTEGER_TYPE + && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0))) + < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))) + && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0))) + == TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp1, 0)))) + && (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0))) + != TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp1, 0))))) + { + enum machine_mode innermode + = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0))); + this_optab = usmul_widen_optab; + if (mode == GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (innermode)) + { + if (this_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing) + { + if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0)))) + expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0), + TREE_OPERAND (subexp1, 0), + NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, 0); + else + expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0), + TREE_OPERAND (subexp1, 0), + NULL_RTX, &op1, &op0, 0); + + goto binop3; + } + } + } + /* Check for a multiplication with matching signedness. */ + else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == NOP_EXPR + && TREE_CODE (type) == INTEGER_TYPE + && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0))) + < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))) + && ((TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST + && int_fits_type_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), + TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0))) + /* Don't use a widening multiply if a shift will do. */ + && ((GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))) + > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) + || exact_log2 (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) < 0)) + || + (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == NOP_EXPR + && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE + (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0))) + == TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE + (TREE_OPERAND + (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))) + /* If both operands are extended, they must either both + be zero-extended or both be sign-extended. */ + && (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE + (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0))) + == TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE + (TREE_OPERAND + (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0))))))) + { + tree op0type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)); + enum machine_mode innermode = TYPE_MODE (op0type); + bool zextend_p = TYPE_UNSIGNED (op0type); + optab other_optab = zextend_p ? smul_widen_optab : umul_widen_optab; + this_optab = zextend_p ? umul_widen_optab : smul_widen_optab; + + if (mode == GET_MODE_2XWIDER_MODE (innermode)) + { + if (this_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing) + { + if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST) + expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0), + TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), + NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, EXPAND_NORMAL); + else + expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0), + TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0), + NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, EXPAND_NORMAL); + goto binop3; + } + else if (other_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing + && innermode == word_mode) + { + rtx htem, hipart; + op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)); + if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST) + op1 = convert_modes (innermode, mode, + expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)), + unsignedp); + else + op1 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0)); + temp = expand_binop (mode, other_optab, op0, op1, target, + unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN); + hipart = gen_highpart (innermode, temp); + htem = expand_mult_highpart_adjust (innermode, hipart, + op0, op1, hipart, + zextend_p); + if (htem != hipart) + emit_move_insn (hipart, htem); + return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp); + } + } + } + expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), + subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0); + return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (expand_mult (mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp)); + + case TRUNC_DIV_EXPR: + case FLOOR_DIV_EXPR: + case CEIL_DIV_EXPR: + case ROUND_DIV_EXPR: + case EXACT_DIV_EXPR: + if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM) + target = 0; + /* Possible optimization: compute the dividend with EXPAND_SUM + then if the divisor is constant can optimize the case + where some terms of the dividend have coeffs divisible by it. */ + expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), + subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0); + return expand_divmod (0, code, mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp); + + case RDIV_EXPR: + goto binop; + + case TRUNC_MOD_EXPR: + case FLOOR_MOD_EXPR: + case CEIL_MOD_EXPR: + case ROUND_MOD_EXPR: + if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM) + target = 0; + expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), + subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0); + return expand_divmod (1, code, mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp); + + case FIX_ROUND_EXPR: + case FIX_FLOOR_EXPR: + case FIX_CEIL_EXPR: + gcc_unreachable (); /* Not used for C. */ + + case FIX_TRUNC_EXPR: + op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + if (target == 0 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM) + target = gen_reg_rtx (mode); + expand_fix (target, op0, unsignedp); + return target; + + case FLOAT_EXPR: + op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + if (target == 0 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM) + target = gen_reg_rtx (mode); + /* expand_float can't figure out what to do if FROM has VOIDmode. + So give it the correct mode. With -O, cse will optimize this. */ + if (GET_MODE (op0) == VOIDmode) + op0 = copy_to_mode_reg (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))), + op0); + expand_float (target, op0, + TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))); + return target; + + case NEGATE_EXPR: + op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0); + if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM) + target = 0; + temp = expand_unop (mode, + optab_for_tree_code (NEGATE_EXPR, type), + op0, target, 0); + gcc_assert (temp); + return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp); + + case ABS_EXPR: + op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0); + if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM) + target = 0; + + /* ABS_EXPR is not valid for complex arguments. */ + gcc_assert (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT + && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT); + + /* Unsigned abs is simply the operand. Testing here means we don't + risk generating incorrect code below. */ + if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (type)) + return op0; + + return expand_abs (mode, op0, target, unsignedp, + safe_from_p (target, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1)); + + case MAX_EXPR: + case MIN_EXPR: + target = original_target; + if (target == 0 + || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM + || (MEM_P (target) && MEM_VOLATILE_P (target)) + || GET_MODE (target) != mode + || (REG_P (target) + && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)) + target = gen_reg_rtx (mode); + expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), + target, &op0, &op1, 0); + + /* First try to do it with a special MIN or MAX instruction. + If that does not win, use a conditional jump to select the proper + value. */ + this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type); + temp = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, target, unsignedp, + OPTAB_WIDEN); + if (temp != 0) + return temp; + + /* At this point, a MEM target is no longer useful; we will get better + code without it. */ + + if (! REG_P (target)) + target = gen_reg_rtx (mode); + + /* If op1 was placed in target, swap op0 and op1. */ + if (target != op0 && target == op1) + { + temp = op0; + op0 = op1; + op1 = temp; + } + + /* We generate better code and avoid problems with op1 mentioning + target by forcing op1 into a pseudo if it isn't a constant. */ + if (! CONSTANT_P (op1)) + op1 = force_reg (mode, op1); + + { + enum rtx_code comparison_code; + rtx cmpop1 = op1; + + if (code == MAX_EXPR) + comparison_code = unsignedp ? GEU : GE; + else + comparison_code = unsignedp ? LEU : LE; + + /* Canonicalize to comparisons against 0. */ + if (op1 == const1_rtx) + { + /* Converting (a >= 1 ? a : 1) into (a > 0 ? a : 1) + or (a != 0 ? a : 1) for unsigned. + For MIN we are safe converting (a <= 1 ? a : 1) + into (a <= 0 ? a : 1) */ + cmpop1 = const0_rtx; + if (code == MAX_EXPR) + comparison_code = unsignedp ? NE : GT; + } + if (op1 == constm1_rtx && !unsignedp) + { + /* Converting (a >= -1 ? a : -1) into (a >= 0 ? a : -1) + and (a <= -1 ? a : -1) into (a < 0 ? a : -1) */ + cmpop1 = const0_rtx; + if (code == MIN_EXPR) + comparison_code = LT; + } +#ifdef HAVE_conditional_move + /* Use a conditional move if possible. */ + if (can_conditionally_move_p (mode)) + { + rtx insn; + + /* ??? Same problem as in expmed.c: emit_conditional_move + forces a stack adjustment via compare_from_rtx, and we + lose the stack adjustment if the sequence we are about + to create is discarded. */ + do_pending_stack_adjust (); + + start_sequence (); + + /* Try to emit the conditional move. */ + insn = emit_conditional_move (target, comparison_code, + op0, cmpop1, mode, + op0, op1, mode, + unsignedp); + + /* If we could do the conditional move, emit the sequence, + and return. */ + if (insn) + { + rtx seq = get_insns (); + end_sequence (); + emit_insn (seq); + return target; + } + + /* Otherwise discard the sequence and fall back to code with + branches. */ + end_sequence (); + } +#endif + if (target != op0) + emit_move_insn (target, op0); + + temp = gen_label_rtx (); + do_compare_rtx_and_jump (target, cmpop1, comparison_code, + unsignedp, mode, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, temp); + } + emit_move_insn (target, op1); + emit_label (temp); + return target; + + case BIT_NOT_EXPR: + op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0); + if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM) + target = 0; + temp = expand_unop (mode, one_cmpl_optab, op0, target, 1); + gcc_assert (temp); + return temp; + + /* ??? Can optimize bitwise operations with one arg constant. + Can optimize (a bitwise1 n) bitwise2 (a bitwise3 b) + and (a bitwise1 b) bitwise2 b (etc) + but that is probably not worth while. */ + + /* BIT_AND_EXPR is for bitwise anding. TRUTH_AND_EXPR is for anding two + boolean values when we want in all cases to compute both of them. In + general it is fastest to do TRUTH_AND_EXPR by computing both operands + as actual zero-or-1 values and then bitwise anding. In cases where + there cannot be any side effects, better code would be made by + treating TRUTH_AND_EXPR like TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR; but the question is + how to recognize those cases. */ + + case TRUTH_AND_EXPR: + code = BIT_AND_EXPR; + case BIT_AND_EXPR: + goto binop; + + case TRUTH_OR_EXPR: + code = BIT_IOR_EXPR; + case BIT_IOR_EXPR: + goto binop; + + case TRUTH_XOR_EXPR: + code = BIT_XOR_EXPR; + case BIT_XOR_EXPR: + goto binop; + + case LSHIFT_EXPR: + case RSHIFT_EXPR: + case LROTATE_EXPR: + case RROTATE_EXPR: + if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1)) + subtarget = 0; + if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM) + target = 0; + op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0); + return expand_shift (code, mode, op0, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, + unsignedp); + + /* Could determine the answer when only additive constants differ. Also, + the addition of one can be handled by changing the condition. */ + case LT_EXPR: + case LE_EXPR: + case GT_EXPR: + case GE_EXPR: + case EQ_EXPR: + case NE_EXPR: + case UNORDERED_EXPR: + case ORDERED_EXPR: + case UNLT_EXPR: + case UNLE_EXPR: + case UNGT_EXPR: + case UNGE_EXPR: + case UNEQ_EXPR: + case LTGT_EXPR: + temp = do_store_flag (exp, + modifier != EXPAND_STACK_PARM ? target : NULL_RTX, + tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode, 0); + if (temp != 0) + return temp; + + /* For foo != 0, load foo, and if it is nonzero load 1 instead. */ + if (code == NE_EXPR && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) + && original_target + && REG_P (original_target) + && (GET_MODE (original_target) + == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))) + { + temp = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), original_target, + VOIDmode, 0); + + /* If temp is constant, we can just compute the result. */ + if (GET_CODE (temp) == CONST_INT) + { + if (INTVAL (temp) != 0) + emit_move_insn (target, const1_rtx); + else + emit_move_insn (target, const0_rtx); + + return target; + } + + if (temp != original_target) + { + enum machine_mode mode1 = GET_MODE (temp); + if (mode1 == VOIDmode) + mode1 = tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode; + + temp = copy_to_mode_reg (mode1, temp); + } + + op1 = gen_label_rtx (); + emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (temp, const0_rtx, EQ, NULL_RTX, + GET_MODE (temp), unsignedp, op1); + emit_move_insn (temp, const1_rtx); + emit_label (op1); + return temp; + } + + /* If no set-flag instruction, must generate a conditional store + into a temporary variable. Drop through and handle this + like && and ||. */ + + if (! ignore + && (target == 0 + || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM + || ! safe_from_p (target, exp, 1) + /* Make sure we don't have a hard reg (such as function's return + value) live across basic blocks, if not optimizing. */ + || (!optimize && REG_P (target) + && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))) + target = gen_reg_rtx (tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode); + + if (target) + emit_move_insn (target, const0_rtx); + + op1 = gen_label_rtx (); + jumpifnot (exp, op1); + + if (target) + emit_move_insn (target, const1_rtx); + + emit_label (op1); + return ignore ? const0_rtx : target; + + case TRUTH_NOT_EXPR: + if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM) + target = 0; + op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, VOIDmode, 0); + /* The parser is careful to generate TRUTH_NOT_EXPR + only with operands that are always zero or one. */ + temp = expand_binop (mode, xor_optab, op0, const1_rtx, + target, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN); + gcc_assert (temp); + return temp; + + case STATEMENT_LIST: + { + tree_stmt_iterator iter; + + gcc_assert (ignore); + + for (iter = tsi_start (exp); !tsi_end_p (iter); tsi_next (&iter)) + expand_expr (tsi_stmt (iter), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier); + } + return const0_rtx; + + case COND_EXPR: + /* A COND_EXPR with its type being VOID_TYPE represents a + conditional jump and is handled in + expand_gimple_cond_expr. */ + gcc_assert (!VOID_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp))); + + /* Note that COND_EXPRs whose type is a structure or union + are required to be constructed to contain assignments of + a temporary variable, so that we can evaluate them here + for side effect only. If type is void, we must do likewise. */ + + gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type) + && !ignore + && TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) != void_type_node + && TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) != void_type_node); + + /* If we are not to produce a result, we have no target. Otherwise, + if a target was specified use it; it will not be used as an + intermediate target unless it is safe. If no target, use a + temporary. */ + + if (modifier != EXPAND_STACK_PARM + && original_target + && safe_from_p (original_target, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1) + && GET_MODE (original_target) == mode +#ifdef HAVE_conditional_move + && (! can_conditionally_move_p (mode) + || REG_P (original_target)) +#endif + && !MEM_P (original_target)) + temp = original_target; + else + temp = assign_temp (type, 0, 0, 1); + + do_pending_stack_adjust (); + NO_DEFER_POP; + op0 = gen_label_rtx (); + op1 = gen_label_rtx (); + jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0); + store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), temp, + modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM); + + emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (op1)); + emit_barrier (); + emit_label (op0); + store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), temp, + modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM); + + emit_label (op1); + OK_DEFER_POP; + return temp; + + case VEC_COND_EXPR: + target = expand_vec_cond_expr (exp, target); + return target; + + case MODIFY_EXPR: + { + tree lhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0); + tree rhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1); + + gcc_assert (ignore); + + /* Check for |= or &= of a bitfield of size one into another bitfield + of size 1. In this case, (unless we need the result of the + assignment) we can do this more efficiently with a + test followed by an assignment, if necessary. + + ??? At this point, we can't get a BIT_FIELD_REF here. But if + things change so we do, this code should be enhanced to + support it. */ + if (TREE_CODE (lhs) == COMPONENT_REF + && (TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_IOR_EXPR + || TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_AND_EXPR) + && TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 0) == lhs + && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1)) == COMPONENT_REF + && integer_onep (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (lhs, 1))) + && integer_onep (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1), 1)))) + { + rtx label = gen_label_rtx (); + int value = TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_IOR_EXPR; + do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1), + value ? label : 0, + value ? 0 : label); + expand_assignment (lhs, build_int_cst (TREE_TYPE (rhs), value)); + do_pending_stack_adjust (); + emit_label (label); + return const0_rtx; + } + + expand_assignment (lhs, rhs); + + return const0_rtx; + } + + case RETURN_EXPR: + if (!TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) + expand_null_return (); + else + expand_return (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + return const0_rtx; + + case ADDR_EXPR: + return expand_expr_addr_expr (exp, target, tmode, modifier); + + case COMPLEX_EXPR: + /* Get the rtx code of the operands. */ + op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + op1 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)); + + if (!target) + target = gen_reg_rtx (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp))); + + /* Move the real (op0) and imaginary (op1) parts to their location. */ + write_complex_part (target, op0, false); + write_complex_part (target, op1, true); + + return target; + + case REALPART_EXPR: + op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + return read_complex_part (op0, false); + + case IMAGPART_EXPR: + op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + return read_complex_part (op0, true); + + case RESX_EXPR: + expand_resx_expr (exp); + return const0_rtx; + + case TRY_CATCH_EXPR: + case CATCH_EXPR: + case EH_FILTER_EXPR: + case TRY_FINALLY_EXPR: + /* Lowered by tree-eh.c. */ + gcc_unreachable (); + + case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR: + case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR: + case TARGET_EXPR: + case CASE_LABEL_EXPR: + case VA_ARG_EXPR: + case BIND_EXPR: + case INIT_EXPR: + case CONJ_EXPR: + case COMPOUND_EXPR: + case PREINCREMENT_EXPR: + case PREDECREMENT_EXPR: + case POSTINCREMENT_EXPR: + case POSTDECREMENT_EXPR: + case LOOP_EXPR: + case EXIT_EXPR: + case TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR: + case TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR: + /* Lowered by gimplify.c. */ + gcc_unreachable (); + + case EXC_PTR_EXPR: + return get_exception_pointer (cfun); + + case FILTER_EXPR: + return get_exception_filter (cfun); + + case FDESC_EXPR: + /* Function descriptors are not valid except for as + initialization constants, and should not be expanded. */ + gcc_unreachable (); + + case SWITCH_EXPR: + expand_case (exp); + return const0_rtx; + + case LABEL_EXPR: + expand_label (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + return const0_rtx; + + case ASM_EXPR: + expand_asm_expr (exp); + return const0_rtx; + + case WITH_SIZE_EXPR: + /* WITH_SIZE_EXPR expands to its first argument. The caller should + have pulled out the size to use in whatever context it needed. */ + return expand_expr_real (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), original_target, tmode, + modifier, alt_rtl); + + case REALIGN_LOAD_EXPR: + { + tree oprnd0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0); + tree oprnd1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1); + tree oprnd2 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2); + rtx op2; + + this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type); + expand_operands (oprnd0, oprnd1, NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, EXPAND_NORMAL); + op2 = expand_normal (oprnd2); + temp = expand_ternary_op (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, op2, + target, unsignedp); + gcc_assert (temp); + return temp; + } + + case DOT_PROD_EXPR: + { + tree oprnd0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0); + tree oprnd1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1); + tree oprnd2 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2); + rtx op2; + + expand_operands (oprnd0, oprnd1, NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, EXPAND_NORMAL); + op2 = expand_normal (oprnd2); + target = expand_widen_pattern_expr (exp, op0, op1, op2, + target, unsignedp); + return target; + } + + case WIDEN_SUM_EXPR: + { + tree oprnd0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0); + tree oprnd1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1); + + expand_operands (oprnd0, oprnd1, NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, 0); + target = expand_widen_pattern_expr (exp, op0, NULL_RTX, op1, + target, unsignedp); + return target; + } + + case REDUC_MAX_EXPR: + case REDUC_MIN_EXPR: + case REDUC_PLUS_EXPR: + { + op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)); + this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type); + temp = expand_unop (mode, this_optab, op0, target, unsignedp); + gcc_assert (temp); + return temp; + } + + case VEC_LSHIFT_EXPR: + case VEC_RSHIFT_EXPR: + { + target = expand_vec_shift_expr (exp, target); + return target; + } + + default: + return lang_hooks.expand_expr (exp, original_target, tmode, + modifier, alt_rtl); + } + + /* Here to do an ordinary binary operator. */ + binop: + expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), + subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0); + binop2: + this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type); + binop3: + if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM) + target = 0; + temp = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, target, + unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN); + gcc_assert (temp); + return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp); +} +#undef REDUCE_BIT_FIELD + +/* Subroutine of above: reduce EXP to the precision of TYPE (in the + signedness of TYPE), possibly returning the result in TARGET. */ +static rtx +reduce_to_bit_field_precision (rtx exp, rtx target, tree type) +{ + HOST_WIDE_INT prec = TYPE_PRECISION (type); + if (target && GET_MODE (target) != GET_MODE (exp)) + target = 0; + /* For constant values, reduce using build_int_cst_type. */ + if (GET_CODE (exp) == CONST_INT) + { + HOST_WIDE_INT value = INTVAL (exp); + tree t = build_int_cst_type (type, value); + return expand_expr (t, target, VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL); + } + else if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (type)) + { + rtx mask; + if (prec < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT) + mask = immed_double_const (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << prec) - 1, 0, + GET_MODE (exp)); + else + mask = immed_double_const ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) -1, + ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 + << (prec - HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)) - 1, + GET_MODE (exp)); + return expand_and (GET_MODE (exp), exp, mask, target); + } + else + { + tree count = build_int_cst (NULL_TREE, + GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (exp)) - prec); + exp = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (exp), exp, count, target, 0); + return expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (exp), exp, count, target, 0); + } +} + +/* Subroutine of above: returns 1 if OFFSET corresponds to an offset that + when applied to the address of EXP produces an address known to be + aligned more than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */ + +static int +is_aligning_offset (tree offset, tree exp) +{ + /* Strip off any conversions. */ + while (TREE_CODE (offset) == NON_LVALUE_EXPR + || TREE_CODE (offset) == NOP_EXPR + || TREE_CODE (offset) == CONVERT_EXPR) + offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0); + + /* We must now have a BIT_AND_EXPR with a constant that is one less than + power of 2 and which is larger than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */ + if (TREE_CODE (offset) != BIT_AND_EXPR + || !host_integerp (TREE_OPERAND (offset, 1), 1) + || compare_tree_int (TREE_OPERAND (offset, 1), + BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT / BITS_PER_UNIT) <= 0 + || !exact_log2 (tree_low_cst (TREE_OPERAND (offset, 1), 1) + 1) < 0) + return 0; + + /* Look at the first operand of BIT_AND_EXPR and strip any conversion. + It must be NEGATE_EXPR. Then strip any more conversions. */ + offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0); + while (TREE_CODE (offset) == NON_LVALUE_EXPR + || TREE_CODE (offset) == NOP_EXPR + || TREE_CODE (offset) == CONVERT_EXPR) + offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0); + + if (TREE_CODE (offset) != NEGATE_EXPR) + return 0; + + offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0); + while (TREE_CODE (offset) == NON_LVALUE_EXPR + || TREE_CODE (offset) == NOP_EXPR + || TREE_CODE (offset) == CONVERT_EXPR) + offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0); + + /* This must now be the address of EXP. */ + return TREE_CODE (offset) == ADDR_EXPR && TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0) == exp; +} + +/* Return the tree node if an ARG corresponds to a string constant or zero + if it doesn't. If we return nonzero, set *PTR_OFFSET to the offset + in bytes within the string that ARG is accessing. The type of the + offset will be `sizetype'. */ + +tree +string_constant (tree arg, tree *ptr_offset) +{ + tree array, offset; + STRIP_NOPS (arg); + + if (TREE_CODE (arg) == ADDR_EXPR) + { + if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0)) == STRING_CST) + { + *ptr_offset = size_zero_node; + return TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0); + } + else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0)) == VAR_DECL) + { + array = TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0); + offset = size_zero_node; + } + else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0)) == ARRAY_REF) + { + array = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0), 0); + offset = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0), 1); + if (TREE_CODE (array) != STRING_CST + && TREE_CODE (array) != VAR_DECL) + return 0; + } + else + return 0; + } + else if (TREE_CODE (arg) == PLUS_EXPR) + { + tree arg0 = TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0); + tree arg1 = TREE_OPERAND (arg, 1); + + STRIP_NOPS (arg0); + STRIP_NOPS (arg1); + + if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == ADDR_EXPR + && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0)) == STRING_CST + || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0)) == VAR_DECL)) + { + array = TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0); + offset = arg1; + } + else if (TREE_CODE (arg1) == ADDR_EXPR + && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0)) == STRING_CST + || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0)) == VAR_DECL)) + { + array = TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0); + offset = arg0; + } + else + return 0; + } + else + return 0; + + if (TREE_CODE (array) == STRING_CST) + { + *ptr_offset = fold_convert (sizetype, offset); + return array; + } + else if (TREE_CODE (array) == VAR_DECL) + { + int length; + + /* Variables initialized to string literals can be handled too. */ + if (DECL_INITIAL (array) == NULL_TREE + || TREE_CODE (DECL_INITIAL (array)) != STRING_CST) + return 0; + + /* If they are read-only, non-volatile and bind locally. */ + if (! TREE_READONLY (array) + || TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array) + || ! targetm.binds_local_p (array)) + return 0; + + /* Avoid const char foo[4] = "abcde"; */ + if (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array) == NULL_TREE + || TREE_CODE (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array)) != INTEGER_CST + || (length = TREE_STRING_LENGTH (DECL_INITIAL (array))) <= 0 + || compare_tree_int (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array), length) < 0) + return 0; + + /* If variable is bigger than the string literal, OFFSET must be constant + and inside of the bounds of the string literal. */ + offset = fold_convert (sizetype, offset); + if (compare_tree_int (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array), length) > 0 + && (! host_integerp (offset, 1) + || compare_tree_int (offset, length) >= 0)) + return 0; + + *ptr_offset = offset; + return DECL_INITIAL (array); + } + + return 0; +} + +/* Generate code to calculate EXP using a store-flag instruction + and return an rtx for the result. EXP is either a comparison + or a TRUTH_NOT_EXPR whose operand is a comparison. + + If TARGET is nonzero, store the result there if convenient. + + If ONLY_CHEAP is nonzero, only do this if it is likely to be very + cheap. + + Return zero if there is no suitable set-flag instruction + available on this machine. + + Once expand_expr has been called on the arguments of the comparison, + we are committed to doing the store flag, since it is not safe to + re-evaluate the expression. We emit the store-flag insn by calling + emit_store_flag, but only expand the arguments if we have a reason + to believe that emit_store_flag will be successful. If we think that + it will, but it isn't, we have to simulate the store-flag with a + set/jump/set sequence. */ + +static rtx +do_store_flag (tree exp, rtx target, enum machine_mode mode, int only_cheap) +{ + enum rtx_code code; + tree arg0, arg1, type; + tree tem; + enum machine_mode operand_mode; + int invert = 0; + int unsignedp; + rtx op0, op1; + enum insn_code icode; + rtx subtarget = target; + rtx result, label; + + /* If this is a TRUTH_NOT_EXPR, set a flag indicating we must invert the + result at the end. We can't simply invert the test since it would + have already been inverted if it were valid. This case occurs for + some floating-point comparisons. */ + + if (TREE_CODE (exp) == TRUTH_NOT_EXPR) + invert = 1, exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0); + + arg0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0); + arg1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1); + + /* Don't crash if the comparison was erroneous. */ + if (arg0 == error_mark_node || arg1 == error_mark_node) + return const0_rtx; + + type = TREE_TYPE (arg0); + operand_mode = TYPE_MODE (type); + unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (type); + + /* We won't bother with BLKmode store-flag operations because it would mean + passing a lot of information to emit_store_flag. */ + if (operand_mode == BLKmode) + return 0; + + /* We won't bother with store-flag operations involving function pointers + when function pointers must be canonicalized before comparisons. */ +#ifdef HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare + if (HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare + && ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == POINTER_TYPE + && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))) + == FUNCTION_TYPE)) + || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) == POINTER_TYPE + && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))) + == FUNCTION_TYPE)))) + return 0; +#endif + + STRIP_NOPS (arg0); + STRIP_NOPS (arg1); + + /* Get the rtx comparison code to use. We know that EXP is a comparison + operation of some type. Some comparisons against 1 and -1 can be + converted to comparisons with zero. Do so here so that the tests + below will be aware that we have a comparison with zero. These + tests will not catch constants in the first operand, but constants + are rarely passed as the first operand. */ + + switch (TREE_CODE (exp)) + { + case EQ_EXPR: + code = EQ; + break; + case NE_EXPR: + code = NE; + break; + case LT_EXPR: + if (integer_onep (arg1)) + arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = unsignedp ? LEU : LE; + else + code = unsignedp ? LTU : LT; + break; + case LE_EXPR: + if (! unsignedp && integer_all_onesp (arg1)) + arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = LT; + else + code = unsignedp ? LEU : LE; + break; + case GT_EXPR: + if (! unsignedp && integer_all_onesp (arg1)) + arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = GE; + else + code = unsignedp ? GTU : GT; + break; + case GE_EXPR: + if (integer_onep (arg1)) + arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = unsignedp ? GTU : GT; + else + code = unsignedp ? GEU : GE; + break; + + case UNORDERED_EXPR: + code = UNORDERED; + break; + case ORDERED_EXPR: + code = ORDERED; + break; + case UNLT_EXPR: + code = UNLT; + break; + case UNLE_EXPR: + code = UNLE; + break; + case UNGT_EXPR: + code = UNGT; + break; + case UNGE_EXPR: + code = UNGE; + break; + case UNEQ_EXPR: + code = UNEQ; + break; + case LTGT_EXPR: + code = LTGT; + break; + + default: + gcc_unreachable (); + } + + /* Put a constant second. */ + if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == REAL_CST || TREE_CODE (arg0) == INTEGER_CST) + { + tem = arg0; arg0 = arg1; arg1 = tem; + code = swap_condition (code); + } + + /* If this is an equality or inequality test of a single bit, we can + do this by shifting the bit being tested to the low-order bit and + masking the result with the constant 1. If the condition was EQ, + we xor it with 1. This does not require an scc insn and is faster + than an scc insn even if we have it. + + The code to make this transformation was moved into fold_single_bit_test, + so we just call into the folder and expand its result. */ + + if ((code == NE || code == EQ) + && TREE_CODE (arg0) == BIT_AND_EXPR && integer_zerop (arg1) + && integer_pow2p (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 1))) + { + tree type = lang_hooks.types.type_for_mode (mode, unsignedp); + return expand_expr (fold_single_bit_test (code == NE ? NE_EXPR : EQ_EXPR, + arg0, arg1, type), + target, VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL); + } + + /* Now see if we are likely to be able to do this. Return if not. */ + if (! can_compare_p (code, operand_mode, ccp_store_flag)) + return 0; + + icode = setcc_gen_code[(int) code]; + if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing + || (only_cheap && insn_data[(int) icode].operand[0].mode != mode)) + { + /* We can only do this if it is one of the special cases that + can be handled without an scc insn. */ + if ((code == LT && integer_zerop (arg1)) + || (! only_cheap && code == GE && integer_zerop (arg1))) + ; + else if (! only_cheap && (code == NE || code == EQ) + && TREE_CODE (type) != REAL_TYPE + && ((abs_optab->handlers[(int) operand_mode].insn_code + != CODE_FOR_nothing) + || (ffs_optab->handlers[(int) operand_mode].insn_code + != CODE_FOR_nothing))) + ; + else + return 0; + } + + if (! get_subtarget (target) + || GET_MODE (subtarget) != operand_mode) + subtarget = 0; + + expand_operands (arg0, arg1, subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0); + + if (target == 0) + target = gen_reg_rtx (mode); + + result = emit_store_flag (target, code, op0, op1, + operand_mode, unsignedp, 1); + + if (result) + { + if (invert) + result = expand_binop (mode, xor_optab, result, const1_rtx, + result, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN); + return result; + } + + /* If this failed, we have to do this with set/compare/jump/set code. */ + if (!REG_P (target) + || reg_mentioned_p (target, op0) || reg_mentioned_p (target, op1)) + target = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (target)); + + emit_move_insn (target, invert ? const0_rtx : const1_rtx); + result = compare_from_rtx (op0, op1, code, unsignedp, + operand_mode, NULL_RTX); + if (GET_CODE (result) == CONST_INT) + return (((result == const0_rtx && ! invert) + || (result != const0_rtx && invert)) + ? const0_rtx : const1_rtx); + + /* The code of RESULT may not match CODE if compare_from_rtx + decided to swap its operands and reverse the original code. + + We know that compare_from_rtx returns either a CONST_INT or + a new comparison code, so it is safe to just extract the + code from RESULT. */ + code = GET_CODE (result); + + label = gen_label_rtx (); + gcc_assert (bcc_gen_fctn[(int) code]); + + emit_jump_insn ((*bcc_gen_fctn[(int) code]) (label)); + emit_move_insn (target, invert ? const1_rtx : const0_rtx); + emit_label (label); + + return target; +} + + +/* Stubs in case we haven't got a casesi insn. */ +#ifndef HAVE_casesi +# define HAVE_casesi 0 +# define gen_casesi(a, b, c, d, e) (0) +# define CODE_FOR_casesi CODE_FOR_nothing +#endif + +/* If the machine does not have a case insn that compares the bounds, + this means extra overhead for dispatch tables, which raises the + threshold for using them. */ +#ifndef CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD +#define CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD (HAVE_casesi ? 4 : 5) +#endif /* CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD */ + +unsigned int +case_values_threshold (void) +{ + return CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD; +} + +/* Attempt to generate a casesi instruction. Returns 1 if successful, + 0 otherwise (i.e. if there is no casesi instruction). */ +int +try_casesi (tree index_type, tree index_expr, tree minval, tree range, + rtx table_label ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, rtx default_label) +{ + enum machine_mode index_mode = SImode; + int index_bits = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (index_mode); + rtx op1, op2, index; + enum machine_mode op_mode; + + if (! HAVE_casesi) + return 0; + + /* Convert the index to SImode. */ + if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (index_type)) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (index_mode)) + { + enum machine_mode omode = TYPE_MODE (index_type); + rtx rangertx = expand_normal (range); + + /* We must handle the endpoints in the original mode. */ + index_expr = build2 (MINUS_EXPR, index_type, + index_expr, minval); + minval = integer_zero_node; + index = expand_normal (index_expr); + emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (rangertx, index, LTU, NULL_RTX, + omode, 1, default_label); + /* Now we can safely truncate. */ + index = convert_to_mode (index_mode, index, 0); + } + else + { + if (TYPE_MODE (index_type) != index_mode) + { + index_type = lang_hooks.types.type_for_size (index_bits, 0); + index_expr = fold_convert (index_type, index_expr); + } + + index = expand_normal (index_expr); + } + + do_pending_stack_adjust (); + + op_mode = insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[0].mode; + if (! (*insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[0].predicate) + (index, op_mode)) + index = copy_to_mode_reg (op_mode, index); + + op1 = expand_normal (minval); + + op_mode = insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[1].mode; + op1 = convert_modes (op_mode, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (minval)), + op1, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (minval))); + if (! (*insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[1].predicate) + (op1, op_mode)) + op1 = copy_to_mode_reg (op_mode, op1); + + op2 = expand_normal (range); + + op_mode = insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[2].mode; + op2 = convert_modes (op_mode, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (range)), + op2, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (range))); + if (! (*insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[2].predicate) + (op2, op_mode)) + op2 = copy_to_mode_reg (op_mode, op2); + + emit_jump_insn (gen_casesi (index, op1, op2, + table_label, default_label)); + return 1; +} + +/* Attempt to generate a tablejump instruction; same concept. */ +#ifndef HAVE_tablejump +#define HAVE_tablejump 0 +#define gen_tablejump(x, y) (0) +#endif + +/* Subroutine of the next function. + + INDEX is the value being switched on, with the lowest value + in the table already subtracted. + MODE is its expected mode (needed if INDEX is constant). + RANGE is the length of the jump table. + TABLE_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx for the table itself. + + DEFAULT_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx to jump to if the + index value is out of range. */ + +static void +do_tablejump (rtx index, enum machine_mode mode, rtx range, rtx table_label, + rtx default_label) +{ + rtx temp, vector; + + if (INTVAL (range) > cfun->max_jumptable_ents) + cfun->max_jumptable_ents = INTVAL (range); + + /* Do an unsigned comparison (in the proper mode) between the index + expression and the value which represents the length of the range. + Since we just finished subtracting the lower bound of the range + from the index expression, this comparison allows us to simultaneously + check that the original index expression value is both greater than + or equal to the minimum value of the range and less than or equal to + the maximum value of the range. */ + + emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (index, range, GTU, NULL_RTX, mode, 1, + default_label); + + /* If index is in range, it must fit in Pmode. + Convert to Pmode so we can index with it. */ + if (mode != Pmode) + index = convert_to_mode (Pmode, index, 1); + + /* Don't let a MEM slip through, because then INDEX that comes + out of PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS won't be a valid address, + and break_out_memory_refs will go to work on it and mess it up. */ +#ifdef PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS + if (flag_pic && !REG_P (index)) + index = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, index); +#endif + + /* If flag_force_addr were to affect this address + it could interfere with the tricky assumptions made + about addresses that contain label-refs, + which may be valid only very near the tablejump itself. */ + /* ??? The only correct use of CASE_VECTOR_MODE is the one inside the + GET_MODE_SIZE, because this indicates how large insns are. The other + uses should all be Pmode, because they are addresses. This code + could fail if addresses and insns are not the same size. */ + index = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, + gen_rtx_MULT (Pmode, index, + GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (CASE_VECTOR_MODE))), + gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode, table_label)); +#ifdef PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS + if (flag_pic) + index = PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS (index); + else +#endif + index = memory_address_noforce (CASE_VECTOR_MODE, index); + temp = gen_reg_rtx (CASE_VECTOR_MODE); + vector = gen_const_mem (CASE_VECTOR_MODE, index); + convert_move (temp, vector, 0); + + emit_jump_insn (gen_tablejump (temp, table_label)); + + /* If we are generating PIC code or if the table is PC-relative, the + table and JUMP_INSN must be adjacent, so don't output a BARRIER. */ + if (! CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE && ! flag_pic) + emit_barrier (); +} + +int +try_tablejump (tree index_type, tree index_expr, tree minval, tree range, + rtx table_label, rtx default_label) +{ + rtx index; + + if (! HAVE_tablejump) + return 0; + + index_expr = fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR, index_type, + fold_convert (index_type, index_expr), + fold_convert (index_type, minval)); + index = expand_normal (index_expr); + do_pending_stack_adjust (); + + do_tablejump (index, TYPE_MODE (index_type), + convert_modes (TYPE_MODE (index_type), + TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (range)), + expand_normal (range), + TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (range))), + table_label, default_label); + return 1; +} + +/* Nonzero if the mode is a valid vector mode for this architecture. + This returns nonzero even if there is no hardware support for the + vector mode, but we can emulate with narrower modes. */ + +int +vector_mode_valid_p (enum machine_mode mode) +{ + enum mode_class class = GET_MODE_CLASS (mode); + enum machine_mode innermode; + + /* Doh! What's going on? */ + if (class != MODE_VECTOR_INT + && class != MODE_VECTOR_FLOAT) + return 0; + + /* Hardware support. Woo hoo! */ + if (targetm.vector_mode_supported_p (mode)) + return 1; + + innermode = GET_MODE_INNER (mode); + + /* We should probably return 1 if requesting V4DI and we have no DI, + but we have V2DI, but this is probably very unlikely. */ + + /* If we have support for the inner mode, we can safely emulate it. + We may not have V2DI, but me can emulate with a pair of DIs. */ + return targetm.scalar_mode_supported_p (innermode); +} + +/* Return a CONST_VECTOR rtx for a VECTOR_CST tree. */ +static rtx +const_vector_from_tree (tree exp) +{ + rtvec v; + int units, i; + tree link, elt; + enum machine_mode inner, mode; + + mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)); + + if (initializer_zerop (exp)) + return CONST0_RTX (mode); + + units = GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode); + inner = GET_MODE_INNER (mode); + + v = rtvec_alloc (units); + + link = TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (exp); + for (i = 0; link; link = TREE_CHAIN (link), ++i) + { + elt = TREE_VALUE (link); + + if (TREE_CODE (elt) == REAL_CST) + RTVEC_ELT (v, i) = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (TREE_REAL_CST (elt), + inner); + else + RTVEC_ELT (v, i) = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (elt), + TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (elt), + inner); + } + + /* Initialize remaining elements to 0. */ + for (; i < units; ++i) + RTVEC_ELT (v, i) = CONST0_RTX (inner); + + return gen_rtx_CONST_VECTOR (mode, v); +} +#include "gt-expr.h" |
